From 0873800a423c987c4c7ab91abf3d34a592ebe2c0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yuri Chornoivan Date: Wed, 26 Jun 2013 20:13:00 +0000 Subject: Add Esperanto, Turkish and Brazilian Portuguese translations --- docs/installer/eo.po | 3159 +++++++++++++++++++++ docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml | 129 + docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml | 88 + docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml | 161 ++ docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml | 45 + docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml | 85 + docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml | 33 + docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml | 41 + docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml | 23 + docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml | 39 + docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml | 37 + docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml | 67 + docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml | 63 + docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml | 83 + docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml | 61 + docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml | 116 + docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml | 36 + docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml | 44 + docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml | 31 + docs/installer/eo/installer.xml | 147 + docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml | 46 + docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml | 25 + docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml | 208 ++ docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml | 35 + docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml | 32 + docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml | 63 + docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml | 68 + docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml | 53 + docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml | 67 + docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml | 32 + docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml | 87 + docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml | 34 + docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml | 44 + docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml | 30 + docs/installer/makedoc.sh | 2 +- docs/installer/pt_BR.po | 3295 ++++++++++++++++++++++ docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml | 130 + docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml | 86 + docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml | 164 ++ docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml | 45 + docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml | 88 + docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml | 34 + docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml | 41 + docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml | 23 + docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml | 40 + docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml | 38 + docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml | 67 + docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml | 66 + docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml | 83 + docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml | 64 + docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml | 119 + docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml | 38 + docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml | 46 + docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml | 31 + docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml | 153 + docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml | 47 + docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml | 29 + docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml | 210 ++ docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml | 35 + docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml | 33 + docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml | 65 + docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml | 72 + docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml | 57 + docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml | 67 + docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml | 33 + docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml | 93 + docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml | 35 + docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml | 45 + docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml | 31 + docs/installer/tr.po | 3272 +++++++++++++++++++++ docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml | 130 + docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml | 86 + docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml | 159 ++ docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml | 45 + docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml | 85 + docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml | 33 + docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml | 41 + docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml | 23 + docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml | 40 + docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml | 37 + docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml | 67 + docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml | 64 + docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml | 84 + docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml | 61 + docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml | 117 + docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml | 38 + docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml | 43 + docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml | 31 + docs/installer/tr/installer.xml | 149 + docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml | 46 + docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml | 27 + docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml | 211 ++ docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml | 35 + docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml | 32 + docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml | 63 + docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml | 69 + docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml | 56 + docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml | 67 + docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml | 31 + docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml | 89 + docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml | 36 + docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml | 45 + docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml | 30 + 103 files changed, 16258 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo.po create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/installer.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR.po create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr.po create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/installer.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml create mode 100644 docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml (limited to 'docs/installer') diff --git a/docs/installer/eo.po b/docs/installer/eo.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2be8b1c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo.po @@ -0,0 +1,3159 @@ +# Esperanto translation of Mageia Installer Help +# Copyright (C) 2013 Mageia Documentation Team +# This file is distributed under the same license as the MAgeia Installer package. +# Pablo Foche , 2012, 2013. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Installer Help\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-05-16 20:28+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: Esperanto \n" +"Language: eo\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. type: Content of:
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:32 +msgid "License and Release Notes" +msgstr "Licenco kaj publikig-notoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" width=" +"\"800\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:45 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "Licenco" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license " +"terms and conditions carefully." +msgstr "" +"Antaŭ ol instali <application>Magejon</application>, bv. legi la licencon " +"zorgeme." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51 +msgid "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</" +"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tiuj kondiĉoj aplikiĝas al la tuta distribuaĵo <application>Magejo</" +"application> kaj devas esti akceptataj antaŭ ol daŭrigi la instaladon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:55 +msgid "" +"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"Por akcepti nur selektu <guilabel>Akceptu</guilabel> kaj klaku sur " +"<guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:58 +msgid "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. " +"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer." +msgstr "" +"Se vi decidas ne akcepti tiujn kondiĉojn, tiam ni dankas vin pro via " +"rigardo. Klakante sur <guibutton>Ĉesu</guibutton> vi reŝarĝos vian " +"komputilon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:68 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "Publikig-notoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:75 +msgid "" +"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, " +"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" +"Por vidi kio estas nova en ĉi tiu versio de <application>Magejo</" +"application>, klaku sur la butono <guibutton>Publikig-notoj (Release Notes) " +"</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:4 +msgid "User and Superuser Management" +msgstr "Uzula kaj superuzula administrado" + +#. Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but +#. changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing +#. about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or +#. disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous +#. screen), marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand +#. "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? +#. JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading +#. marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot +#. marja 2013-04-26 added new note +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/addUser.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" " +"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:34 +msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:" +msgstr "Kreo de mastrumanta pasvorto (Set administrator (root) password):" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:38 +msgid "" +"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to " +"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the " +"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the " +"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green " +"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are " +"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped " +"the first password by comparing them." +msgstr "" +"Estas konsilinde por ĉiuj instaloj de <application>Magejo</application> krei " +"superuzulan pasvorton, kutime nomita la <emphasis>mastrumanta (root) " +"pasvorto</emphasis> en Linukso. Kiam vi tajpos pasvorton en la supra skatolo " +"ĝia koloro ŝanĝiĝos el ruĝa al flava kaj verda dependante de la forto de la " +"pasvorto. Verda kampo signifas ke vi estas uzanta fortan pasvorton. Vi devas " +"retajpi la saman pasvorton en la plisuba skatolo, tio certigos ke vi ne " +"mistajpis la unuan pasvorton dank'al komparo inter ambaŭ." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:48 +msgid "" +"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." +msgstr "" +"En ĉiuj pasvortoj diferenciĝas inter majuskloj kaj minuskloj, estas pli bone " +"utiligi miksaĵon de literoj (majusklaj kaj minusklaj), nombroj kaj aliaj " +"karaktroj en pasvorto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:56 +msgid "Enter a user" +msgstr "Enigo de uzulo (Enter a user)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:59 +msgid "" +"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but " +"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and " +"anything else the average user does with his computer" +msgstr "" +"Aldonu uzulon ĉi tie. Uzulo havas malpli da rajtoj ol la superuzulo (root), " +"sed sufiĉajn por retumi, utiligi oficej-programojn aŭ ludi komputil-ludojn " +"kaj por io ajn kion la averaĝa uzulo faras perkomputile" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the " +"users icon." +msgstr "" +"<guibutton>Piktogramo</guibutton>: se vi klakas sur ĉi tiu butono vi ŝanĝos " +"la uzulan ikonon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:70 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text " +"box." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Vera nomo</guilabel>: Metu la uzulan realan nomon en ĉi tiu teksta " +"skatolo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:75 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let " +"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case " +"sensitive.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Saluta nomo (login name)</guilabel>: Ĉi tie eniru la uzulan " +"salutan nomon aŭ lasu ke drakx-o utiligu version de la uzula vera nomo. " +"<emphasis>La saluta nomo diferencigas inter majuskloj kaj minuskloj.</" +"emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:81 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user " +"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the " +"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Pasvorto</guilabel>: En ĉi tiu teksta skatolo vi devus tajpi la " +"uzulan pasvorton. Estas kampo je la fino de la teksto-skatolo indikanta la " +"forton de la pasvorto. (Vidu ankaŭ <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:87 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this " +"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user " +"password text boxes." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Pasvorto (denove)</guilabel>: Retajpu la uzulan pasvorton en ĉi " +"tiu teksta skatolo kaj darkx kontrolos ĉu la pasvorto estas la sama en ĉiuj " +"uzulaj pasvortaj teksto-skatoloj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:94 +msgid "" +"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but " +"write protected) home directory." +msgstr "" +"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but " +"write protected) home directory." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:97 +msgid "" +"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - " +"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that " +"is both read and write protected." +msgstr "" +"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - " +"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that " +"is both read and write protected." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:101 +msgid "" +"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised " +"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot." +msgstr "" +"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised " +"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:105 +msgid "" +"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all " +"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step " +"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>." +msgstr "" +"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all " +"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step " +"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:109 +msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." +msgstr "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:116 +msgid "Advanced User Management" +msgstr "Sperta uzulo-administrado" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:119 +msgid "" +"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a " +"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. " +"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account." +msgstr "" +"Se la <guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> butono estas klakita aperos ekrano " +"ebliganta eldoni la konfiguron de la aldonata uzulo. Krome, vi povas " +"aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account " +"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest " +"should save his important files to a USB key." +msgstr "" +"Ĉio konservita de gasto uzanta defaŭltan <emphasis>rbash-an</emphasis> " +"gastan konton en la dosierujo /home estos forigita post la elsaluto. La " +"gasto devus konservi gravajn dosierojn en USB-ŝlosilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a " +"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, " +"but he has more restricted access than normal users." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Aktivigi gastan konton (Enable guest account)</guilabel>: Ĉi tie " +"vi povas aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton. Gasta konto ebligos gaston " +"ensaluti kaj uzi la komputilon, sed ĝi havas pli da limigoj ol tiu de " +"normalaj uzuloj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:138 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the " +"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are " +"Bash, Dash and Sh" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Ŝelo</guilabel>: Ĉi tio vidigos liston ebligantan ŝanĝi la \"shell" +"\"-on uzatan de la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. Oni povas elekti Bash-" +"on, Dash-on kaj Sh-on" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:144 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you " +"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless " +"you know what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Uzula ID</guilabel>: Ĉi tie vi povas starigi uzulan identigilon " +"por la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. La identigilo estas nombro. Lasu " +"ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID. Also a " +"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know " +"what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Grupa ID</guilabel>: Ĉi tio ebligas vin starigi grupan " +"identigilon. Ankaŭ temas pri nombro, kutime la sama kiel tiu de la uzulo. " +"Lasu ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:11 +msgid "Choose the mount points" +msgstr "Elekti surmetingojn" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" +#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) +#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes +#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans +#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it +#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) +#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" +"\" align=\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=" +"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you " +"can change the mount points." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tie vi vidas la linuksajn subdiskojn kiuj estis trovitaj en via " +"komputilo. Se vi ne akordas kun la sugestoj de <application>DrakX</" +"application> vi povas ŝanĝi la surmetingojn." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> " +"(root) partition." +msgstr "" +"Se vi ŝanĝas ion, certiĝu pri tio ke vi daŭre havas <literal>/</literal> " +"(radikan) subdiskon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point" +"\", \"Type\")." +msgstr "" +"Ĉiu subdisko estas montrita tiel: \"Aparato\" (\"Kapablo\", \"Surmetingo\", " +"\"Speco\")." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49 +msgid "" +"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], " +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")." +msgstr "" +"\"Aparato\", konsistas el: \"fiksita disko\", [\"fiksita diska litero\"], " +"\"subdiska nombro\" (ekzemple, \"sda5\")." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55 +msgid "" +"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from " +"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> " +"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for " +"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store " +"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</" +"literal> partition of a cauldron install." +msgstr "" +"Se vi havas multajn subdiskojn, vi povas elekti multajn malsamajn " +"surmetingojn per la faldebla menuo, kiel <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/" +"home</literal> kaj <literal>/var</literal>. Vi povas ankaŭ fari viajn " +"proprajn surmetingojn kiel <literal>/video</literal> por subdisko kie vi " +"volas konservi viajn filmojn, aŭ <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> por la " +"<literal>/home</literal> subdisko de kaldrona instalo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:65 +msgid "" +"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount " +"point field blank." +msgstr "" +"En kazoj de subdiskoj al kiuj vi ne volas aliri vi povas lasi la surmetingan " +"kampon malplena." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:71 +msgid "" +"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, " +"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen " +"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size." +msgstr "" +"Klaku sur <guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton> se vi ne scias kion elekti, kaj tiam " +"aktivigu <guilabel>Agordi subdiskon</guilabel>. En la aperonta ekrano, vi " +"povas klaki sur konkreta subdisko por vidi ĝian specon kaj grandon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) " +"DrakX suggests, or more." +msgstr "" +"Se vi certas pri tio ke la surmetingoj estas ĝustaj, klaku sur " +"<guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton>, kaj elektu ĉu vi nur volas strukturi la " +"subdisko(j)n kiu(j)n sugestas DrakX aŭ pli da ili." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:18 +msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" +msgstr "DrakX, la instalilo de Magejo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:21 +msgid "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." +msgstr "" +"Se vi estas nova aŭ nesperta uzulo de GNU/Linukso, la instalilo de Magejo " +"estas desegnita por igi vian instaladon aŭ ĝisdatigon tiel facila kiel eble." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:29 +msgid "" +"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will " +"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need." +msgstr "" +"La komenca menua ekrano havas plurajn elektojn, tamen defaŭlte lanĉiĝos la " +"mageja instalilo, kiu kutime havos ĉion kion oni bezonas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:35 +msgid "Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "Bonveniga instal-ekrano" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:39 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" width=" +"\"800\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-" +"intro-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/installer.xml:34 en/installer.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use " +"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></" +"xref>." +msgstr "" +"Se okazus problemoj dum la instalado, tiam povus esti necese uzi specialajn " +"instalajn elektojn, vidu <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:52 +msgid "The installation steps" +msgstr "La instal-paŝoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed " +"on the side panel of the screen." +msgstr "" +"La instal-procezo dividiĝas en serio da paŝoj, kiuj povas esti sekvataj per " +"la flanka panelo de la ekrano." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options." +msgstr "" +"Ĉiu paŝo havas unu aŭ pliajn ekranojn kiuj povas ankaŭ havi " +"<guibutton>Progresintan</guibutton> butonon kun aldonaj sed malofte " +"bezonataj elektoj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further " +"explanations about the current step." +msgstr "" +"La plimulto el ekranoj havas butonon pri <guibutton>Helpo</guibutton> " +"havigantan pliajn karigojn pri tiu paŝo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/installer.xml:66 +msgid "" +"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is " +"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure " +"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" +"Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon, " +"sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe. Post la formatigo de partigo aŭ post " +"la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi ĝin " +"povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio ke " +"vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> samtempe. Post tio, premu <guibutton>Alt " +"Ctrl Delete</guibutton> samtempe por reŝarĝi." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:80 +msgid "Installation options" +msgstr "Instal-elektoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:83 +msgid "" +"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one " +"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</" +"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>" +msgstr "" +"Se la instalo malsukcesas tiam povas esti necese provi denove kaj uzi unu el " +"la aldonaj elektoj aperontaj per la premo de la klavo F1 (Helpo), vidu <xref " +"linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:87 +msgid "This will open the following text based help." +msgstr "Ĉi tio malfermos la jenan teksto-bazitan helpon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:91 +msgid "Installation Help Screen" +msgstr "Instala helpo-ekrano" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align=" +"\"center\" width=\"720\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"400\" xml:id=\"installer-" +"im2\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:105 +msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" +msgstr "Instal-problemoj kaj eblaj solvoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:111 +msgid "No Graphical Interface" +msgstr "Sen grafika interfaco" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:116 +msgid "" +"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. " +"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low " +"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt." +msgstr "" +"Post la komenca ekrano vi eble ne alvenos al la ekrano pri lingvo-selekto. " +"Ĉi tio povas okazi kun kelkaj grafik-kartoj kaj malnovaj maŝinoj. Provu " +"utiligi malaltan rezolucion per la tajpo de \"vgalo\" en la komand-linio." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit " +"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be " +"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit " +"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"Se la aparataro estas tre malnova, grafika instalo povas esti neebla. Ĉikaze " +"povas esti rekomendinde provi teksto-bazitan instalon. Por tio premu la " +"klavon ESC en la unua bonveniga ekrano kaj konfirmu per ENTER. Tiam aperos " +"nigra ekrano kun la vorto \"boot:\". Tajpu \"text\" kaj premu ENTER. Nun " +"daŭrigu la instaladon tekste. <emphasis></emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:135 +msgid "The Install Freezes" +msgstr "Instal-paneoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:138 +msgid "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of " +"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with " +"other options as necessary." +msgstr "" +"Se la sistemo ŝajnas panei dum la instalo, tio povas esti pro aparatar-" +"detekta problemo. Ĉikaze la aŭtomata detektado de aparatoj povas esti " +"prokrastita. Por provi tion tajpu <code>noauto</code> en la komando-linio. " +"Ĉi tiu elekto povas ankaŭ esti miksita kun la antaŭa se estas necese." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:147 +msgid "Kernel Options" +msgstr "Kernaj elektoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:150 +msgid "" +"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e." +"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM." +msgstr "" +"Ili estos malofte necesaj, sed en kelkaj kazoj la aparataro povas kalkuli la " +"disponeblan ĉefmemoron malĝuste. Por konkretigi ĝin permane vi povas utiligi " +"la parametron mem=xxxM, kie xxx estas la ĝusta kvanto da ĉefmemoro. Ekzemple " +"\"mem=256M\" specifus 256MB-ojn el ĉefmemoro." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:23 +msgid "Install or Upgrade" +msgstr "Instalado/ĝisdatigo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align=" +"\"center\" width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:34 +msgid "Install" +msgstr "Instalado" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:36 +msgid "" +"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation." +msgstr "" +"Uzu tiun elekton por freŝa instalado de <application>Magejo</application> ." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41 +msgid "Upgrade" +msgstr "Ĝisdatigu" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43 +msgid "" +"If you have one or more <application>Mageia 2</application> installations on " +"your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the " +"latest release." +msgstr "" +"Se vi havas unu aŭ pliajn ekzistantajn instalojn de <application>Magejo</" +"application> en via sistemo, la instalilo ebligos vin ĝisdatigi unu el ili " +"al la plej lasta versio." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to " +"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been " +"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in " +"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an " +"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you " +"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl " +"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</" +"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" +"Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon, " +"sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe. Post la strukturado de subdisko aŭ " +"post la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi " +"ĝin povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio " +"ke vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> samtempe. Post tio, premu <guibutton>Alt " +"Ctrl Delete</guibutton> samtempe por reŝarĝi." + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice " +"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</" +"emphasis> do this later in the install." +msgstr "" +"Se vi rimarkas ke vi forgesis selekti aldonan lingvon, vi povas reveni el la " +"ekrano \"Instalado/ĝisdatigo\" al la ekrano por lingva elekto per la premo " +"de <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. <emphasis>Ne</emphasis> faru tion " +"poste en la instalo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:14 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "Klavaro" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:17 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." +msgstr "" +"DrakX selektas adekvatan klavaron por via lingvo. Se ne estas disponebla ĝi " +"aŭtomate elektos usonan klavaron." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\" align=\"center" +"\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" +"Estu certa pri tio ke la selekto estas ĝusta aŭ elektu male alian klavaron. " +"Se vi ne scias kiun klavaron vi havas rigardu la specifojn kiuj venas kun " +"via sistemo aŭ demandu al la vendisto. Eble estas etikedo sur la klavaro kiu " +"identigas ĝin. Vi ankaŭ povas rigardi ĉi tie: <link xlink:href=\"http://eo." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Klavarfasono\">eo.wikipedia.org/wiki/Klavarfasono</link>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</" +"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there." +msgstr "" +"Se via klavaro ne estas en la montrita listo klaku sur la butono " +"<guibutton>Pli (Plu)</guibutton> por aliri etenditan liston kaj selektu vian " +"klavaron tie." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45 +msgid "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though " +"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly " +"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the " +"full list." +msgstr "" +"Post elekti klavaron per la butono <guibutton>Pli (Plu)</guibutton> , vi " +"revenos al la unua priklavara ekrano sed povos ŝajni kvazaŭ klavaro de tiu " +"ekrano estas elektita. Vi povas sentime ignori tiun anomalion kaj daŭrigi la " +"instaladon: Via klavaro estas tiu kiun vi elektis per la etendita listo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:55 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin " +"and non-Latin keyboard layouts" +msgstr "" +"Se vi elektis klavaron nebazitan sur latinaj literoj, vi vidos aldonan " +"ekranon demandantan kiel vi ŝatus ŝanĝi inter latinaj kaj nelatinaj klavaroj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureServices.xml:12 +msgid "Configure your Services" +msgstr "Konfiguru viajn Servojn" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureServices.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tie vi povas decidi kiuj servoj (ne) devus esti lanĉitaj je la starto de " +"la sistemo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:30 +msgid "" +"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and " +"see all services in it." +msgstr "" +"Estas kvar grupoj, klaku sur la triangulo kiu troviĝas antaŭ grupo por " +"etendi ĝin kaj vidi ĉiujn servojn disponeblajn." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:34 +msgid "The setting DrakX chose are usually good." +msgstr "La elekto kiun faris DrakX estas kutime adekvata." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." +msgstr "Se vi elektas servon, iu informo pri ĝi montriĝos en la suba skatolo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:41 +msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." +msgstr "Ŝanĝu aferojn nur se vi scias tre bone kion vi estas faranta." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:23 +msgid "Please choose a language to use" +msgstr "Bv. elekti la uzotan lingvon" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during " +"the installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" +"Selektu vian preferatan lingvon unue per la disfaldo de via kontinenta " +"listo. <application>Magejo</application> uzos ĉi tiun selekton dum la " +"instalado kaj por la instalita sistemo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:30 +msgid "" +"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your " +"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the " +"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be " +"difficult to add extra language support after installation." +msgstr "" +"Se vi bezonas instali en via sistemo plurajn lingvojn por vi aŭ aliaj " +"uzuloj, tiam vi devas utiligi la butonon <guibutton>Multaj lingvoj (Multiple " +"languages)</guibutton> por aldoni ilin nun. Estos malfacile aldoni plian " +"lingvan eltenon post la instalo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" " +"width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them " +"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be " +"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ." +msgstr "" +"Se vi elektas pli ol unu lingvon, vi devas selekti unu el ili kiel vian " +"preferatan lingvon en la komenca lingva ekrano. Ĝi markiĝos ankaŭ en la " +"plurlingva ekrano ." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:51 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well." +msgstr "" +"Se via klavara lingvo ne estas la sama kiel via preferata lingvo, tiam estas " +"rekomendinde instali la lingvon de via klavaro ankaŭ." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:57 +msgid "" +"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the " +"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your " +"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages." +msgstr "" +"Magejo uzas UTF-8 (Unikodon) defaŭlte. Ĉi tio povas esti malŝaltita en la " +"plurlingva ekrano se vi certas pri tio ke ĝi estas neadekvata por via " +"lingvo. Malŝalti unikodon havos konsekvencojn sur ĉiuj instalitaj lingvoj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:64 +msgid "" +"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia " +"Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system." +msgstr "" +"Vi povas ŝanĝi la lingvon de via sistemo post la instalo per la Kontrolilo " +"de Magejo -> Sistemo -> Agordi skrib-sistemojn." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:4 +msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03 +#. test comment - johnr +#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct +#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I +#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD +#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every " +"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:25 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "Kreo de subdiskoj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the " +"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install " +"<application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" +"En tiu ĉi ekrano vi povas vidi la enhavon de via(j) stor-aparato(j) kaj la " +"loko-proponon de DrakX por la instalo de <application>Magejo</application>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:33 +msgid "" +"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your " +"particular hard drive(s) layout and content." +msgstr "" +"La disponeblaj elektoj en la suba listo varios depende de la trajtoj kaj " +"enhavo de via konkreta(j) stor-aparato(j)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" +"\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\" align=\"center" +"\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:45 +msgid "Use Existing Partitions" +msgstr "Uzu ekzistantajn subdiskojn" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:48 +msgid "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." +msgstr "" +"Se tiu elekto estas disponebla oni trovis linuks-akordigeblajn subdiskojn " +"kiuj povas esti utiligataj por la instalo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:54 +msgid "Use Free Space" +msgstr "Uzu liberan spacon" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." +msgstr "" +"Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en via fiksita disko ĉi tiu elekto uzos ĝin por " +"nova Mageja instalo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:62 +msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition" +msgstr "Uzu la liberan spacon de vindoza subdisko" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it." +msgstr "" +"Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en ekzistanta vindoza subdisko, la instalilo " +"povas proponi utiligi ĝin." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:69 +msgid "" +"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, " +"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all " +"important files!" +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tio povas esti utila maniero atingi spacon por via nova Mageja instalo, " +"sed temas pri riska operacio do vi devus fari sekurec-kopion de ĉiuj gravaj " +"dosieroj antaŭe!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The " +"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to " +"back up your personal files." +msgstr "" +"Rimarku ke ĉi tio implikas la ŝrumpigon de la vindoza subdisko. La subdisko " +"devas esti \"pura\", tio estas Vindozo devis fermiĝi senprobleme la lastan " +"fojon kiam ĝi estis uzita. Ĝi ankaŭ devas esti malfragmentiĝita kvankam tio " +"ne estas garantio pri tio ke ĉiuj dosieroj en la subdisko estis movitaj el " +"la areo uzota. Estas ege rekomendinde realigi sekurec-kopion de viaj " +"personaj dosieroj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:84 +msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk." +msgstr "Forviŝu kaj uzu la tutan diskon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87 +msgid "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia." +msgstr "Ĉi tiu elekto utiligos la tutan diskon por Magejo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:90 +msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!" +msgstr "" +"Atentu! Ĉi tio forigos ĈIUJN datumojn en la elektita fiksita disko. Estu " +"zorgema!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:93 +msgid "" +"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already " +"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use " +"this option." +msgstr "" +"Se vi volas uzi parton de la disko por alia celo aŭ vi havas datumojn en la " +"disko kiujn vi ne volas perdi, ne elektu ĉi tion." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:100 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "Subdiskigo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102 +msgid "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tio havigas al vi plenan kontrolon sur la lokigo de la instalo en via(j) " +"fiksita(j) disko(j)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:109 +msgid "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available " +"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested " +"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 " +"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning " +"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following " +"settings:" +msgstr "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available " +"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested " +"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 " +"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning " +"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following " +"settings:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:117 +msgid "\"Align to\" \"MiB\"" +msgstr "\"Align to\" \"MiB\"" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119 +msgid "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\"" +msgstr "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\"" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:121 +msgid "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes." +msgstr "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:5 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "Grafika medio" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11 +msgid "" +"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine " +"tune your choice." +msgstr "Depende de viaj elektoj ĉi tie, povos aperi aliaj agordaj ekranoj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13 +msgid "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package " +"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the " +"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button" +msgstr "" +"Post la selekto-paŝo(j), vi vidos glitan ekranon dum la pakaĵ-instalo. La " +"glitado povas esti malaktivigita premante la butonon <guilabel>Detaloj</" +"guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or " +"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full " +"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if " +"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the " +"default software choices for these desktop environments. The " +"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, " +"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default." +msgstr "" +"Elektu ĉu vi preferas uzi la labortablajn mediojn <application>KDE-on</" +"application> aŭ <application>Gnome-on</application>. Ambaŭ venas kun " +"kompleta aro da utilaj aplikaĵoj kaj iloj. Aktivigu <guilabel>Agordi</" +"guilabel> se vi volas utiligi unu aŭ ambaŭ, aŭ se vi volas personigi la " +"defaŭltajn program-elektojn de tiuj labortablaj medioj. La labortablo " +"<application>LXDE-o</application> estas pli malpeza ol la du antaŭaj. Ĝi " +"havas malpli da grafikaj uzulaj interfacoj kaj pakaĵoj instalitaj defaŭlte." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:4 +msgid "Package Group Selection" +msgstr "Pakaĵaj grupoj" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." +msgstr "" +"Pakaĵoj estis arigitaj en grupoj por plifaciligi la elekton de tio kion vi " +"bezonas en via sistemo. La grupoj estas sufiĉe memklarigaj, tamen plia " +"informo pri la enhavo de ĉiu pakaĵaro estas disponebla kiam oni metas la " +"musan montrilon sur ili." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23 +msgid "Workstation." +msgstr "Laborstacio." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27 +msgid "Server." +msgstr "Servilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31 +msgid "Graphical Environment." +msgstr "Grafika medio." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or " +"remove packages." +msgstr "" +"Elektado de individuaj pakaĵoj: vi povas uzi ĉi tiun elekton por aldoni aŭ " +"forigi permane pakaĵojn." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do " +"a minimal install." +msgstr "" +"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do " +"a minimal install." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:4 +msgid "Choose Individual Packages" +msgstr "Elekto de individuaj pakaĵoj" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tie vi povas elekti aŭ malelekti aldonajn pakaĵojn por agordi vian " +"instalon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20 +msgid "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</" +"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving " +"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same " +"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and " +"choosing to load it." +msgstr "" +"Post fari vian elekton, vi povas klaki sur la <guibutton>disketa ikono</" +"guibutton> sube en la paĝo por konservi vian pakaĵ-elekton (konservi en USB-" +"ŝlosilo funkcias ankaŭ). Vi povos utiligi ĉi tiun dosieron por instali la " +"samajn pakaĵojn en aliaj sistemo klakante sur la sama butono dum la " +"instalado kaj elektante ŝarĝi ĝin." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:19 +msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake" +msgstr "Agordi subdiskon per DiskDrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you " +"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The " +"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be " +"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable." +msgstr "" +"Se vi volas utiligi ĉifradon en via subdisko <literal>/</literal> vi devas " +"havi apartan subdiskon <literal>/boot</literal>. La ĉifrada elekto por la " +"subdisko <literal>/boot</literal> ne devas esti selektita, alie via sistemo " +"ne startos." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, " +"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what " +"is in them before you start." +msgstr "" +"Agordu via(j)n disko(j)n ĉi tie. Vi povas forigi aŭ krei subdiskojn, ŝanĝi " +"la dosiersistemon de subdisko aŭ ŝanĝi ĝian grandon kaj eĉ vidi kio estas en " +"ĝi antaŭ ol komenci." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:42 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an " +"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them." +msgstr "" +"Estas langeto por ĉiu trovita fiksita disko aŭ alispeca stor-aparato kiel " +"USB-ŝlosilo. Ekzemple sda, sdb kaj sdc se estas tri." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected " +"storage device" +msgstr "" +"Premu <guibutton>Forviŝu ĉion</guibutton> por forigi ĉiujn subdiskojn en la " +"elektita stor-aparato" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it." +msgstr "" +"Por aliaj agoj: klaku sur la dezirata subdisko unue. Tiam vi povos vidi ĝin, " +"elekti dosiersistemon kaj surmetingon, ŝanĝi ĝian grandon aŭ forigi ĝin." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:49 +msgid "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes." +msgstr "Daŭrigu ĝis kiam vi agordos ĉion laŭ via deziro." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:51 +msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready." +msgstr "Klaku sur <guibutton>Finata</guibutton> kiam vi estos preta." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:4 +msgid "Congratulations" +msgstr "Gratulon" + +#. Started by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! +#. marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text +#. same day, added "s" to "sytems" +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"exitInstall-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</" +"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot " +"your computer." +msgstr "" +"Finiĝis la instalado kaj konfigurado de <application>Magejo</application> " +"kaj nun vi povas sekure eltiri la instal-medion kaj reŝarĝi vian komputilon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:25 +msgid "" +"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating " +"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)." +msgstr "" +"Post tiu reŝarĝo, en la ŝarĝila ekrano vi povos elekti kiun operacian " +"sistemon lanĉi (se vi havas pli ol unu)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." +msgstr "" +"Se vi ne ŝanĝis la preferojn de la ŝarĝilo, Magejo estos aŭtomate elektita " +"kaj ŝarĝita." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:31 +msgid "Enjoy!" +msgstr "Ĝuu!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to " +"Mageia" +msgstr "" +"Vizitu www.mageia.org se vi havas demandojn aŭ volas kontribui al Magejo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:4 +msgid "Formatting" +msgstr "Strukturi subdiskojn" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" " +"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tie vi povas elekti kiu(j)n subdisko(j)n vi ŝatus strukturi. Iu ajn " +"datumo en subdisko(j) <emphasis>ne</emphasis> markita(j) por strukturado " +"estos savita." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:29 +msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted" +msgstr "Kutime almenaŭ la subdiskoj elektitaj de DrakX bezonos strukturon" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to " +"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"Klaku sur <guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> por elekti subdiskojn kie vi " +"ŝatus kontroli ĉu ekzistas <emphasis>difektitaj blokoj</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> " +"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen. " +"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions." +msgstr "" +"Se vi ne certas ĉu vi faris la ĝustan elekton, vi povas klaki sur " +"<guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton>, denove sur <guibutton>Antaŭa</guibutton> kaj " +"tiam sur <guibutton>subdiskigo</guibutton> por reveni al la ĉefa ekrano. En " +"tiu ekrano vi havas elekton por vidi kio estas en viaj subdiskoj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> to continue." +msgstr "" +"Se vi estas certa pri la elekto, klaku sur <guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton> " +"por daŭrigi." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:3 +msgid "Updates" +msgstr "Ĝisdatigoj" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 30 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename +#. marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some " +"packages will have been updated or improved." +msgstr "" +"Ekde la publikigo de ĉi tiu versio de <application>Magejo</application>, " +"pluraj pakaĵoj estis probable ĝisdatigitaj aŭ plibonigitaj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, " +"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" +msgstr "" +"Elektu <guilabel>jes</guilabel> se vi deziras elŝuti kaj instali ilin, " +"elektu <guilabel>ne</guilabel> se vi ne volas fari tion nun aŭ se vi ne " +"havas retaliron" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:28 +msgid "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue" +msgstr "Klaku sur <guibutton>Sekvanta</guibutton> por daŭrigi" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:3 +msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters" +msgstr "Diversaj parametroj" + +#. Started by marja on 2012 03 31 +#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! +#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots +#. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-) +#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages +#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and +#. the drakxid-miscellaneous section +#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph +#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph +#. 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. +#. 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:38 +msgid "" +"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want after pressing " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"DrakX faris inteligentajn antaŭelektojn por la konfiguro de via sistemo " +"dependante de tio kion vi elektis kaj la aparataro kiun ĝi mem eltrovis. Vi " +"povas kontroli la konfigurojn ĉi tie kaj ŝanĝi ilin se vi volas klakante sur " +"<guibutton>Konfiguru</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:45 +msgid "System parameters" +msgstr "Sistemaj parametroj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:50 +msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Horzono</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:52 +msgid "" +"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. " +"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/" +">" +msgstr "" +"DrakX elektis tempo-zonon por vi, dependante de via preferata lingvo. Vi " +"povas ŝanĝi ĝin se bezonate. Vidu ankaŭ <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC" +"\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:58 +msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Lando</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you " +"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Se vi ne troviĝas en la selektita lando, estas tre grave ke vi korektu ĝin. " +"Vidu <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:67 +msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Startŝarĝilo</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:69 +msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting." +msgstr "DrakX faris bonajn elektojn por la konfiguro de la sistema ŝarĝilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo" +msgstr "Ŝanĝu nenion se vi ne scias kiel konfiguri Grub kaj/aŭ Lilo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:75 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>" +msgstr "Por plia informo vidu <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:80 +msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Uzula administrado (User management)</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:83 +msgid "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</" +"literal> directories." +msgstr "" +"Vi povas aldoni pliajn uzulojn ĉi tie. Ĉiuj havos sian propran dosierujon " +"<literal>/home</literal>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:89 +msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Servoj</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:91 +msgid "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks." +msgstr "" +"Sistemaj servoj celas tiujn malgrandajn programojn funkciantajn fone " +"(demonoj). Ĉi tiu ilo ebligos vin aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi diversajn taskojn." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:95 +msgid "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly." +msgstr "" +"Vi devus kontroli zorgeme antaŭ ol ŝanĝi ion ĉi tie - eraro povus okazigi ke " +"via komputilo ne funkciu ĝuste." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:99 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" +msgstr "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:106 +msgid "Hardware parameters" +msgstr "Aparatar-parametroj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:111 +msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Klavaro</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:113 +msgid "" +"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on " +"your location, language or type of keyboard." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tie vi konfiguras aŭ ŝanĝas vian klavar-agordon kiu dependas de via " +"lando, lingvo aŭ klavar-speco." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:119 +msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Muso</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:121 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tie vi povas aldoni aŭ konfiguri aliajn indikajn aparatojn, tabuletojn, " +"mov-globojn, ktp." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:126 +msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Son-karto </guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:129 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the " +"options selected will work with your computer." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin agordi vian son-karton. En la plimulto el okazoj " +"la selektitaj elektoj funkcios en via komputilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:135 +msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Grafika interfaco</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:138 +msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian grafik-karto(j)n kaj montrilo(j)n." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:141 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>." +msgstr "Por plia informo vidu <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:147 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im2\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:155 +msgid "Network and Internet parameters" +msgstr "Retaj parametroj" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:161 +msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Reto</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:163 +msgid "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia " +"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the non-free media " +"repositories." +msgstr "" +"Vi povas konfiguri vian reton ĉi tie, sed por ret-kartoj utiligantaj " +"neliberajn pelilojn estas plibone fari tion post la reŝarĝo de la sistemo " +"per <application>Mageja Konfigurilo </application>. Por tio vi devos " +"aktivigi la neliberajn deponejojn." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:170 +msgid "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch " +"that interface as well." +msgstr "" +"Kiam vi aldonas ret-karton ne forgesu konfiguri vian fajronŝirmilon por ke " +"ĝi kontrolu ankaŭ tiun ret-interfacon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:177 +msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Prokuraj serviloj</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:179 +msgid "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." +msgstr "" +"Prokura servilo funkcias kiel peranto inter via komputilo kaj interreto. Ĉi " +"tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian komputilon por utiligi prokuran servon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:184 +msgid "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you " +"need to enter here" +msgstr "" +"Eble vi devas konsulti vian ret-mastrumanton por scii la parametrojn kiujn " +"vi devas enigi ĉi tie" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:193 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "Sekureco" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:198 +msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Sekurec-nivelo </guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:201 +msgid "" +"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default " +"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use." +msgstr "" +"Ĉi tie vi starigas la sekurec-nivelon por via komputilo, en la plimulto el " +"okazoj la defaŭlta konfiguro estas adekvata por ĝenerala uzo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:205 +msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage." +msgstr "Aktivigu la elekton pli adekvatan laŭ viaj bezonoj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:210 +msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Fajroŝirmilo (Fajromuro)</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:212 +msgid "" +"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the " +"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it." +msgstr "" +"Fajroŝirmilo celas esti bariero inter viaj gravaj datumoj kaj la friponoj en " +"la reto kiuj volas kompromiti aŭ forŝteli ilin." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your " +"selections will depend on what you use your computer for." +msgstr "" +"Elektu la servojn kiuj devas havi aliron al via sistemo. Viaj elektoj " +"dependos de tio por kio vi utiligas la komputilon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:221 +msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky." +msgstr "Rimarku ke ebligi ĉion (sen fajroŝirmilo) povas esti tre riska." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:12 +msgid "Configure your Timezone" +msgstr "Konfiguru vian horzonon" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC." +"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC." +"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the " +"same time zone." +msgstr "" +"Elektu vian horzonon selektante vian landon aŭ urbon proksiman kiu troviĝu " +"en la sama tempo-zono." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:30 +msgid "" +"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to " +"GMT, also known as UTC." +msgstr "" +"En la sekva ekrano vi povas alĝustigi vian sisteman horloĝon je la loka horo " +"aŭ je GTM, ankaŭ konata kiel UTC." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:35 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." +msgstr "" +"Se vi havas pli ol unu operacia sistemo en via komputilo, certiĝu pri tio ke " +"ili estas alĝustigitaj ĉiuj je la loka horo aŭ je UTC/GTM." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" +msgstr "" +"Grando-ŝanĝo de la subdisko <application>Vindoza<superscript>®</" +"superscript></application>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" +"Vi havas pli ol unu <application>Vindoza<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> subdisko. Elektu kiu devus esti malgrandigita cele al liberigo " +"de spaco por la instalo de <application>Magejo</application>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:11 +msgid "Setup SCSI" +msgstr "Konfiguri SCSI" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 +#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) +#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the +#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" width=" +"\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32 +msgid "" +"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers " +"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently " +"fail to recognise the drive." +msgstr "" +"DrakX kutime trovas fiksitajn diskojn senprobleme. Ĝi tamen povas ne trovi " +"kelkajn malnovajn SCSI-aparatojn kaj do malsukcesi pri la instalado de la " +"bezonataj peliloj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:36 +msgid "" +"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) " +"you have." +msgstr "" +"Se tio okazas, vi devos permane diri al Drakx kiun SCSI-aparaton vi havas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39 +msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly." +msgstr "DrakX devus tiam esti kapabla konfiguri la aparato(j)n ĝuste." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:4 +msgid "Select mouse" +msgstr "Selekti muson" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place +#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" " +"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"selectMouse-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:23 +msgid "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." +msgstr "" +"Se vin ne kontentigas la funkciado de via muso, vi povas elekti iun malsaman " +"ĉi tie." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</" +"guilabel> is a good choice." +msgstr "" +"Ofte, <guilabel>Universala</guilabel> - <guilabel>Ajna PS/2- kaj USB-musoj</" +"guilabel> estas bona elekto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to " +"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons." +msgstr "" +"Selektu <guilabel>Universalan</guilabel> - <guilabel>Trudi evdev</guilabel> " +"por konfiguri la butonojn kiuj ne funkcias en muso kun ses aŭ pli butonoj." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:3 +msgid "Bootloader main options" +msgstr "Lanĉilaj ĉefaj elektoj" + +#. 2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml, from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence. +#. 2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" " +"align=\"center\" width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=" +"\"setupBootloader-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:16 +msgid "" +"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by " +"the installer, you can change them here." +msgstr "" +"Se vi preferas malsaman lanĉilan konfiguron al tiu elektita aŭtomate fare de " +"la instalilo, vi povas ŝanĝi ĝin ĉi tie." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case " +"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or " +"allow Mageia to create a new one." +msgstr "" +"Eble vi havas jam alian operacian sistemon en via maŝino, tiukaze vi devas " +"decidi ĉu vi volas aldoni Magejon al via ekzistanta lanĉilo aŭ ebligi al " +"Magejo krei novan." + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:26 +msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)" +msgstr "La grafika menuo de Magejo estas bela :)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32 +msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader" +msgstr "Uzi la lanĉilon de Magejo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36 +msgid "" +"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR " +"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other " +"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia " +"boot menu." +msgstr "" +"Defaŭlte Magejo skribas novan GRUB-lanĉilon en la MBR de via unua fiksita " +"disko. Se vi jam havas aliajn operaciajn sistemojn, Magejo provos aldoni " +"ilin al via nova Mageja lanĉilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB " +"legacy and Lilo." +msgstr "" +"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB " +"legacy and Lilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by " +"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is " +"used." +msgstr "" +"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by " +"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is " +"used." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:49 +msgid "" +"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at " +"the Summary page during installation." +msgstr "" +"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at " +"the Summary page during installation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:56 +msgid "Using an existing bootloader" +msgstr "Uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember " +"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the " +"bootloader install location." +msgstr "" +"Se vi decidas uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon tiam vi devos klaki sur la lanĉila " +"butono <guibutton>Konfiguru</guibutton>, kiu ebligos vin ŝanĝi la instal-" +"lokon de la lanĉilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. " +"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning " +"phase earlier, e.g. sda7." +msgstr "" +"Ne selektu aparaton kiel \"sda\" aŭ vi anstataŭigos la ekzistantan MBR. Vi " +"devas selekti la saman radikan subdiskon kiun vi elektis dum la subdiskigo, " +"ekzemple sda7." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71 +msgid "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device." +msgstr "Klarigcele, sda estas aparato, sda7 subdisko." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75 +msgid "" +"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where " +"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to " +"the installer screen." +msgstr "" +"Iru al tty2 per la premo de Ctrl+Alt+F2 kaj tajpu <literal>df</literal> por " +"vidi kie estas via radika subdisko <literal>/</literal>. Ctrl+Alt+F7 venigos " +"vin ree al la instal-ekrano." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader " +"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve " +"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and " +"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in " +"question." +msgstr "" +"La ĝusta procezo por aldoni vian Magejan sistemon al ekzistanta lanĉilo " +"estas preter la celo de tiu ĉi helpilo, tamen en la plimulto el la kazoj " +"estos necese lanĉi lanĉilan instal-programon kiu devus detekti kaj konfiguri " +"ĝin aŭtomate. Vidu la dokumentaron por la konkreta operacia sistemo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:91 +msgid "Bootloader advanced option" +msgstr "Lanĉila sperta elekto" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95 +msgid "" +"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition " +"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</" +"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space." +msgstr "" +"Se vi havas tre limigitan spacon en via disko por subdisko <literal>/</" +"literal> enhavanta samtempe la dosierujon <literal>/tmp</literal>, klaku sur " +"<guibutton>Progresinta</guibutton> kaj aktivigu la skatolon dirantan " +"<guilabel>Purigu /tmp dum ĉiuj startadoj</guilabel>. Tio helpos teni iom da " +"libera spaco." + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1 en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2 +msgid "en" +msgstr "eo" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakX.xml:3 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "Instalado per DrakX-o" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note> +#: en/DrakX.xml:6 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "<note>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:7 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" +"Neniu vidos ĉiujn ekranojn, kiujn vi vidas en ĉi helpo. Tio kiujn ekranojn " +"vi vidos, dependas de via komputilo kaj viaj elektoj dum instalado." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:10 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "</note>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" +"La tekstoj kaj la ekranbildoj en ĉi helpo estas sub licenco CC-BY-SA 3.0 " +"<link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://" +"creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:16 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"Tiu ĉi helpo estas skribita kun helpo de <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco." +"com\">Calenco CMS</link> kreita per <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz" +"\">NeoDoc</link>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:18 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16 +msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:26 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69 +msgid "vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:36 +msgid "then the name of your card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:40 +msgid "and the type of card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44 +msgid "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"Xorg category" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card " +"drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the " +"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the Commandline Interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55 +msgid "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some " +"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:59 +msgid "" +"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to " +"access them, you should do this after your first reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18 +msgid "Choosing your Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:21 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage " +"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing " +"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor " +"documentation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42 +msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:49 +msgid "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:55 +msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:58 +msgid "" +"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the " +"monitor database." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63 +msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:73 +msgid "the monitor manufacturers name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:77 +msgid "the monitor description" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:82 +msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84 +msgid "" +"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as " +"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is " +"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver " +"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it " +"may be wise to be conservative in your selections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4 +msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration" +msgstr "Konfiguri X, grafik-karton kaj monitoron" + +#. Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18 +msgid "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are " +"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window " +"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for " +"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or " +"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</" +"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can " +"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you " +"think the choice is incorrect." +msgstr "" +"Ne gravas kiun grafikan medion (ankaŭ konata kiel labortabla medio) vi " +"elektis por ĉi tiu instalo de <application>Magejo</application>, ili ĉiuj " +"baziĝas sur grafika uzula interfaco nomita <acronym>X Window System</" +"acronym>, aŭ simple <acronym>X</acronym>. Do cele al bona funkciado de " +"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>GNOME</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> aŭ " +"iu alia grafika medio, la jena konfiguro de <acronym>X</acronym> devas esti " +"ĝusta. Elektu la ĝustan konfiguron se vi rimarkas ke <application>DrakX</" +"application> ne elektis konfiguron aŭ vi pensas ke tiu elekto estas malĝusta." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card " +"from the list if needed." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Grafik-karto </guibutton></emphasis>: Elektu vian " +"karton en la listo se bezonate." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:37 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose " +"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor " +"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. " +"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the " +"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Ekrano</guibutton></emphasis>: Vi povas elekti " +"<guilabel>\"Plug'n Play\"</guilabel> siakaze aŭ elekti vian monitoron en la " +"<guilabel>Vendista</guilabel> aŭ <guilabel>Ĝenerala</guilabel> listo. Elektu " +"<guilabel>Akomodata</guilabel> se vi preferas permane starigi la " +"horizontalan kaj vertikalan refreŝ-datumon de via monitoro." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:45 +msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor" +msgstr "Malĝustaj refreŝ-datumoj povas damaĝi vian monitoron" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:51 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired " +"resolution and color depth of your monitor here." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Distingivo</guibutton></emphasis>: Starigu la deziratan " +"distingivon kaj kolorprofundon de via monitoro ĉi tie." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not " +"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your " +"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your " +"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. " +"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be " +"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure " +"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Testo</guibutton></emphasis>: La testo-butono ne ĉiam " +"aperas dum la instalo. Se la butono estas tie, vi povas testi vian " +"konfiguron premante ĝin. Se vi vidas demandon demandantan vin ĉu via " +"konfiguro ĝustas, vi povas respondi \"jes\" kaj la konfiguro estos " +"konservita. Se vi vidas nenion vi revenos al konfigur-ekrano kaj povos " +"rekonfiguri ĉion ĝis kiam la testo sukcesos. <emphasis>Certiĝu pri tio ke " +"via konfiguro estas ĝusta se la testo-butono ne estas disponebla</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to " +"enable or disable various options." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Opcioj</guibutton></emphasis>: Ĉi tie vi povas aktvigi " +"aŭ malaktivigi kelkajn elektojn." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:5 +msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the " +"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen " +"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an " +"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a " +"choice while booting up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:29 +msgid "" +"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't " +"just try something without knowing what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:3 +msgid "Minimal Install" +msgstr "Minimuma instalo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:9 +msgid "" +"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the " +"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></" +"xref>." +msgstr "" +"Vi povas elekti Minimuman Instalon malselektante ĉion en la Pakaĵara Elekta " +"ekrano, vidu <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised " +"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package " +"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>." +msgstr "" +"Minimuma Instalo celas konkretajn uzojn por Magejo kiel servilojn aŭ " +"specialigitajn laborstaciojn. Probable vi uzos ĉi tiun elekton kune kun " +"Permana Pakaĵ-elekto, vidu <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer " +"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X." +msgstr "" +"Se vi elektas ĉi tian instalon la venonta ekrano proponos al vi instali " +"plurajn utilajn aldonaĵojn kiel dokumentojn aŭ Ikso-servilon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:12 +msgid "Security Level" +msgstr "Sekurec-nivelo" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:24 +msgid "You can adjust your security level here." +msgstr "Vi povas alĝustigi vian sekurec-nivelon ĉi tie." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose." +msgstr "Lasu la defaŭltan konfiguron senŝanĝe se vi ne scias kion elekti." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:30 +msgid "" +"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings " +"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center." +msgstr "" +"Post la instalo, ĉiam eblos alĝustigi la sekurec-konfiguron en la fako " +"<guilabel>Sekureco</guilabel> en la Mageja Kontrolilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:13 +msgid "Select your Country / Region" +msgstr "Elektu vian Landon / Regionon" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network." +msgstr "" +"Selektu vian landon aŭ regionon. Ĉi tio estas grava por ĉiaj konfiguroj, " +"kiel la monero kaj senkabla reguliga domajno. Konfiguri eraran landon povus " +"kaŭzi ke vi ne kapablu utiligi senkablan reton." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:32 +msgid "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</" +"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there." +msgstr "" +"Se via lando ne estas en la listo, klaku sur la butono <guilabel>Aliaj " +"Landoj</guilabel> kaj elektu vian landon / regionon tie." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, " +"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the " +"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real " +"choice." +msgstr "" +"Se via lando estas nur en la listo <guilabel>Aliaj Landoj</guilabel>, post " +"klaki sur <guibutton>Enorde</guibutton> povas ŝajni ke vi elektis landon de " +"la unua listo. Bv. ignori tion, DrakX daŭrigos kun via reala elekto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:46 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "Enir-metodo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:49 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-" +"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method " +"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, " +"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you " +"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." +msgstr "" +"En la ekrano <guilabel>Aliaj Landoj</guilabel> vi povas ankaŭ elekti enir-" +"metodon (sube en la listo). Enir-metodoj ebligas uzulojn tajpi mult-lingvajn " +"literojn (ĉina, japana, korea, ktp.). IBus estas la defaŭlta enir-metodo en " +"Magejaj DVD, kaj en Afrikaj/Barataj kaj Aziaj/ne-Barataj KD. Por aziaj kaj " +"afrikaj tajp-konfiguroj, IBus agordos la defaŭltan enir-metodon aŭtomate " +"tiel uzuloj ne bezonos konfiguri ĝin permane. Aliaj enir-metodoj (SCIM, " +"GCIN, HIME, ktp.) ankaŭ havigas similajn funkciojn kaj povas esti instalitaj " +"se vi aldonis HTTP/FTP-an medion antaŭ la pakaĵa selekto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -> " +"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root." +msgstr "" +"Se vi nevole preterpaŝis la enir-metodon dum la instalo, vi povas aliri ĝin " +"post ŝarĝi la instalitan sistemon per \"Konfiguri vian Komputilon\" -> " +"\"Sistemo\" aŭ lanĉante localdrake kiel mastrumanto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/media_selection.xml:3 +msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media) +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong) +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/media_selection.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:25 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:30 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:38 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:10 +msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The " +"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection " +"during the next steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29 +msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:33 +msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With " +"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#~ msgid "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Elektu fiksitan diskon purigotan por <application>Magejo</application>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install " +#~ "<application>Mageia</application>." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Selektu la fiksitan diskon kiu devus esti strukturita por " +#~ "<application>Magejo</application>." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk " +#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Certiĝu pri tio ke vi elektas ĝustan fiksitan diskon. Ĉiuj datumoj en la " +#~ "selektita disko perdiĝos. Ĉi tiu paŝo ne povas esti malfarita." + +#~ msgid "Bootloader main options (old page)" +#~ msgstr "Lanĉilaj ĉefaj elektoj (old page)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because " +#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main " +#~ "options''' screen in installer links to." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because " +#~ "the help button for this screen links to that file." + +#~ msgid "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)" +#~ msgstr "Konfiguri X, grafik-karton kaj monitoron (old page)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> " +#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card " +#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> " +#~ "because that is the file the help button for this screen links to." + +#~ msgid "Bootloader expert use" +#~ msgstr "Lanĉila sperta uzo" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/" +#~ "> first." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se vi ne faris jam bv. legi <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/> unue." + +#~ msgid "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually" +#~ msgstr "Aldonante GRUB2-an bazitan sistemon permane" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:" +#~ msgstr "GRUB2-a bazita sistemo povas esti aldonata al Mageja lanĉilo jene:" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version " +#~ "run the following command in a terminal:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Lanĉu la sistemon aldonotan. Por identigi la GRUB2-an version lanĉu la " +#~ "jenan komandon per terminalo:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>" + +#~ msgid "or if that fails try:" +#~ msgstr "aŭ se tio malsukcesas provu:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom " +#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 " +#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during " +#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se la rezulto estas \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (probable kun aldonaĵo), " +#~ "tiam ĝi uzas GRUB (ankaŭ nomata GRUB legacy), ne GRUB2 kaj do via sistemo " +#~ "devus esti identigita senprobleme fare de Magejo dum la instalo kaj " +#~ "aldonita aŭtomate al la menuo." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se la rezulto estas (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, tiam ĝi uzas GRUB2." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root " +#~ "partition:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Notu la version kaj enigu ĉi tiun komandon por identigi la radikan " +#~ "subdiskon:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" + +#~ msgid "This will output something like :" +#~ msgstr "Ĉi tio vidigos ion tian :" + +#~ msgid "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>" + +#~ msgid "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it." +#~ msgstr "tiukaze sdb11 estas la radika subdisko - notu tion." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the " +#~ "following command:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Nun kontrolu ĉu la dosierujo /boot estas en la sama subdisko enigante la " +#~ "jenan komandon:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a " +#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu." +#~ "lst below." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se la subdisko /boot estas malsama al tiu radika tiam notu tion kaj uzu " +#~ "la subdiskon /boot en la linio \"root\" kiam vi eldonos la dosieron menu." +#~ "lst." + +#~ msgid "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia." +#~ msgstr "Vi povas nun malŝalti la sistemon kaj instali Magejon." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the " +#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "En via nova funkcianta Mageja sistemo, malfermu terminalon kaj kiel " +#~ "mastrumanto eldonu la dosieron /boot/grub/menu.lst tiumaniere:" + +#~ msgid "To become root use:" +#~ msgstr "Por agi kiel mastrumanto uzu:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>su -</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>su -</literal>" + +#~ msgid "(enter root password)" +#~ msgstr "(enigu mastrumantan pasvorton)" + +#~ msgid "To open the file in an editor use:" +#~ msgstr "Por malfermi la dosieron per tekstotraktilo uzu:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>" + +#~ msgid "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)" +#~ msgstr "(anstataŭigu \"kwrite\" per \"gedit\" se vi estas uzanta Gnome)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the " +#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on " +#~ "its position in the file:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Aldonu la jenan enigon por via (ekzemple Ubuntuo) sistemo, probable kiel " +#~ "dua elekto. La loko en kiu ĝi aperas en la menuo dependas de la pozicio " +#~ "en la dosiero:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" " +#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy " +#~ "GRUB count from zero." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "En la dua linio \"hd1\" signifas la duan fiksitan diskon, la nombro " +#~ "\"10\" indikas ke temas pri la 11a subdisko. Diskoj kaj subdiskoj en GRUB " +#~ "legacy de Magejo kalkuliĝas ekde nulo." + +#~ msgid "Therefore:" +#~ msgstr "Do:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :" +#~ msgstr "Se la versio de GRUB2 estas 2.xx tiam ŝanĝu la lastan linion al :" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub" +#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se vi bezonis uzi \"grub2-install\" plifrue tiam ŝanĝu <literal>\"grub\"</" +#~ "literal> al <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> en la lasta linio." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</" +#~ "literal> from the last line." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se /boot estis en aparta subdisko, tiam forigu <literal>\"/boot\"</" +#~ "literal> el la lasta linio." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in " +#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Konservu la dosieron kaj reŝarĝu la sistemon. Vi devus vidi vian \"Ubuntu" +#~ "\"-an aldonaĵon en la menuo kaj ĝi devus esti lanĉebla." + +#~ msgid "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader" +#~ msgstr "Uzi ekzistantan GRUB2-an lanĉilon" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader " +#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se vi ankoraŭ ne legis la ĝeneralan parton pri la uzo de ekzistanta " +#~ "lanĉilo, faru tion nun. Vidu <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some " +#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding " +#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details " +#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the " +#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Ekzistas konata eraro okazanta en GRUB2 en kelkaj versioj de Debiano/" +#~ "Ubuntuo kiu malĝuste kreas la dosieron grub.cfg en la momento de la " +#~ "aldono de Magejaj (aŭ Mandrivaj) sistemoj. Detalojn pri la maniero " +#~ "korekti tion vi povas trovi en la forumo de Magejo. Serĉu \"prober\", la " +#~ "temo estas \"grub problem\", la postaĵo #9 havas la informon." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel " +#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub." +#~ "d/40_custom</literal>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Por igi la korekton permanenta tiel ke ĝi postvivu kernajn ĝisdatigojn, " +#~ "la Mageja linio devus esti aldonita al <literal>/etc/grub.d/40_custom</" +#~ "literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. " +#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the " +#~ "preferred solution." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "La eraro estis korektita en os-prober-1.53 publikigita la 8an de majo " +#~ "2012. Nun, ĝisdatigi al nova versio vian GRUB2-an instalon estas la plej " +#~ "bona solvo." diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..178aab98 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="eo" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Instalado per DrakX-o + + + + Neniu vidos ĉiujn ekranojn, kiujn vi vidas en ĉi helpo. Tio kiujn ekranojn +vi vidos, dependas de via komputilo kaj viaj elektoj dum instalado. + + + La tekstoj kaj la ekranbildoj en ĉi helpo estas sub licenco CC-BY-SA 3.0 +http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/ + + Tiu ĉi helpo estas skribita kun helpo de Calenco CMS kreita per NeoDoc + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..961898be --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Licenco kaj publikig-notoj + + + + + +
+ + Licenco + + + Antaŭ ol instali Magejon, bv. legi la licencon +zorgeme. + + Ĉi tiuj kondiĉoj aplikiĝas al la tuta distribuaĵo +Magejo kaj devas esti akceptataj antaŭ ol daŭrigi +la instaladon. + + Por akcepti nur selektu Akceptu kaj klaku sur +Sekvanta. + + Se vi decidas ne akcepti tiujn kondiĉojn, tiam ni dankas vin pro via +rigardo. Klakante sur Ĉesu vi reŝarĝos vian +komputilon. + + + +
+ +
+ + + Publikig-notoj + + + + + Por vidi kio estas nova en ĉi tiu versio de +Magejo, klaku sur la butono +Publikig-notoj (Release Notes) . +
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f909c16a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +
+ + + Uzula kaj superuzula administrado + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + Kreo de mastrumanta pasvorto (Set administrator (root) password): + + + Estas konsilinde por ĉiuj instaloj de Magejo krei +superuzulan pasvorton, kutime nomita la mastrumanta (root) +pasvorto en Linukso. Kiam vi tajpos pasvorton en la supra skatolo +ĝia koloro ŝanĝiĝos el ruĝa al flava kaj verda dependante de la forto de la +pasvorto. Verda kampo signifas ke vi estas uzanta fortan pasvorton. Vi devas +retajpi la saman pasvorton en la plisuba skatolo, tio certigos ke vi ne +mistajpis la unuan pasvorton dank'al komparo inter ambaŭ. + + + En ĉiuj pasvortoj diferenciĝas inter majuskloj kaj minuskloj, estas pli bone +utiligi miksaĵon de literoj (majusklaj kaj minusklaj), nombroj kaj aliaj +karaktroj en pasvorto. + +
+ +
+ + Enigo de uzulo (Enter a user) + + + Aldonu uzulon ĉi tie. Uzulo havas malpli da rajtoj ol la superuzulo (root), +sed sufiĉajn por retumi, utiligi oficej-programojn aŭ ludi komputil-ludojn +kaj por io ajn kion la averaĝa uzulo faras perkomputile + + + + Piktogramo: se vi klakas sur ĉi tiu butono vi ŝanĝos +la uzulan ikonon. + + + + Vera nomo: Metu la uzulan realan nomon en ĉi tiu teksta +skatolo. + + + + Saluta nomo (login name): Ĉi tie eniru la uzulan +salutan nomon aŭ lasu ke drakx-o utiligu version de la uzula vera +nomo. La saluta nomo diferencigas inter majuskloj kaj +minuskloj. + + + + Pasvorto: En ĉi tiu teksta skatolo vi devus tajpi la +uzulan pasvorton. Estas kampo je la fino de la teksto-skatolo indikanta la +forton de la pasvorto. (Vidu ankaŭ ) + + + + Pasvorto (denove): Retajpu la uzulan pasvorton en ĉi +tiu teksta skatolo kaj darkx kontrolos ĉu la pasvorto estas la sama en ĉiuj +uzulaj pasvortaj teksto-skatoloj. + + + + + Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but +write protected) home directory. + + However, while using your new install, any user you add in MCC - +System - Manage users on system will have a home directory that +is both read and write protected. + + If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised +to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot. + + If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all +extra needed users in the Configuration - Summary step +during the install. Choose User management. + + The access permissions can also be changed after the install. + + +
+ +
+ + Sperta uzulo-administrado + + + Se la Progresinta butono estas klakita aperos ekrano +ebliganta eldoni la konfiguron de la aldonata uzulo. Krome, vi povas +aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton. + + + Ĉio konservita de gasto uzanta defaŭltan rbash-an +gastan konton en la dosierujo /home estos forigita post la elsaluto. La +gasto devus konservi gravajn dosierojn en USB-ŝlosilo. + + + + + Aktivigi gastan konton (Enable guest account): Ĉi tie +vi povas aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi gastan konton. Gasta konto ebligos gaston +ensaluti kaj uzi la komputilon, sed ĝi havas pli da limigoj ol tiu de +normalaj uzuloj. + + + + Ŝelo: Ĉi tio vidigos liston ebligantan ŝanĝi la +"shell"-on uzatan de la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. Oni povas elekti +Bash-on, Dash-on kaj Sh-on + + + + Uzula ID: Ĉi tie vi povas starigi uzulan identigilon +por la uzulo aldonita en la antaŭa ekrano. La identigilo estas nombro. Lasu +ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari. + + + + Grupa ID: Ĉi tio ebligas vin starigi grupan +identigilon. Ankaŭ temas pri nombro, kutime la sama kiel tiu de la +uzulo. Lasu ĝin malplena se vi ne scias kion fari. + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..928f37b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + +
+ + Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media) + + + + + + + + + + + + + This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can +add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The +source selection determines which packages will be available for selection +during the next steps. + + For a network source, there are two steps to follow: + + + + Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up. + + + + Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a +mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by +Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With +the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS +installation. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21364f97 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + +
+ + + Elekti surmetingojn + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Ĉi tie vi vidas la linuksajn subdiskojn kiuj estis trovitaj en via +komputilo. Se vi ne akordas kun la sugestoj de +DrakX vi povas ŝanĝi la surmetingojn. + + + Se vi ŝanĝas ion, certiĝu pri tio ke vi daŭre havas / +(radikan) subdiskon. + + + + + Ĉiu subdisko estas montrita tiel: "Aparato" ("Kapablo", "Surmetingo", +"Speco"). + + + + "Aparato", konsistas el: "fiksita disko", ["fiksita diska litero"], +"subdiska nombro" (ekzemple, "sda5"). + + + + + Se vi havas multajn subdiskojn, vi povas elekti multajn malsamajn +surmetingojn per la faldebla menuo, kiel /, +/home kaj /var. Vi povas ankaŭ fari +viajn proprajn surmetingojn kiel /video por subdisko kie +vi volas konservi viajn filmojn, aŭ /cauldron-home por la +/home subdisko de kaldrona instalo. + + + + En kazoj de subdiskoj al kiuj vi ne volas aliri vi povas lasi la surmetingan +kampon malplena. + + + + + Klaku sur Antaŭa se vi ne scias kion elekti, kaj tiam +aktivigu Agordi subdiskon. En la aperonta ekrano, vi +povas klaki sur konkreta subdisko por vidi ĝian specon kaj grandon. + + + Se vi certas pri tio ke la surmetingoj estas ĝustaj, klaku sur +Sekvanta, kaj elektu ĉu vi nur volas strukturi la +subdisko(j)n kiu(j)n sugestas DrakX aŭ pli da ili. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c9dc626 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +
+ + + + + Grafika medio + + + + + + Depende de viaj elektoj ĉi tie, povos aperi aliaj agordaj ekranoj. + + Post la selekto-paŝo(j), vi vidos glitan ekranon dum la pakaĵ-instalo. La +glitado povas esti malaktivigita premante la butonon +Detaloj + + + + + + + Elektu ĉu vi preferas uzi la labortablajn mediojn +KDE-on aŭ +Gnome-on. Ambaŭ venas kun kompleta aro da utilaj +aplikaĵoj kaj iloj. Aktivigu Agordi se vi volas utiligi +unu aŭ ambaŭ, aŭ se vi volas personigi la defaŭltajn program-elektojn de +tiuj labortablaj medioj. La labortablo LXDE-o +estas pli malpeza ol la du antaŭaj. Ĝi havas malpli da grafikaj uzulaj +interfacoj kaj pakaĵoj instalitaj defaŭlte. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa6d6d96 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +
+ + + Pakaĵaj grupoj + + + + + + + + + + Pakaĵoj estis arigitaj en grupoj por plifaciligi la elekton de tio kion vi +bezonas en via sistemo. La grupoj estas sufiĉe memklarigaj, tamen plia +informo pri la enhavo de ĉiu pakaĵaro estas disponebla kiam oni metas la +musan montrilon sur ili. + + + + Laborstacio. + + + + Servilo. + + + + Grafika medio. + + + + Elektado de individuaj pakaĵoj: vi povas uzi ĉi tiun elekton por aldoni aŭ +forigi permane pakaĵojn. + + + Read for instructions on how to do a +minimal install. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..62d6611f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +
+ + + Elekto de individuaj pakaĵoj + + + + + + + + + Ĉi tie vi povas elekti aŭ malelekti aldonajn pakaĵojn por agordi vian +instalon. + + Post fari vian elekton, vi povas klaki sur la disketa +ikono sube en la paĝo por konservi vian pakaĵ-elekton (konservi +en USB-ŝlosilo funkcias ankaŭ). Vi povos utiligi ĉi tiun dosieron por +instali la samajn pakaĵojn en aliaj sistemo klakante sur la sama butono dum +la instalado kaj elektante ŝarĝi ĝin. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af564bfe --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + +
+ + + + Konfiguru viajn Servojn + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Ĉi tie vi povas decidi kiuj servoj (ne) devus esti lanĉitaj je la starto de +la sistemo. + + Estas kvar grupoj, klaku sur la triangulo kiu troviĝas antaŭ grupo por +etendi ĝin kaj vidi ĉiujn servojn disponeblajn. + + La elekto kiun faris DrakX estas kutime adekvata. + + Se vi elektas servon, iu informo pri ĝi montriĝos en la suba skatolo. + + Ŝanĝu aferojn nur se vi scias tre bone kion vi estas faranta. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e470a981 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + +
+ + + + Konfiguru vian horzonon + + + + + + + + + + + + + Elektu vian horzonon selektante vian landon aŭ urbon proksiman kiu troviĝu +en la sama tempo-zono. + + En la sekva ekrano vi povas alĝustigi vian sisteman horloĝon je la loka horo +aŭ je GTM, ankaŭ konata kiel UTC. + + + Se vi havas pli ol unu operacia sistemo en via komputilo, certiĝu pri tio ke +ili estas alĝustigitaj ĉiuj je la loka horo aŭ je UTC/GTM. + +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2fdaeabf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card) + + + + + + DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually +correctly identify your video device. + + If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know +which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: + + + + vendor + + + + then the name of your card + + + + and the type of card + + + + If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in +the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the +Xorg category + + The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card +drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the +option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities. + + Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access +to the Commandline Interface. + + + Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which +may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some +cases only from the card manufacturers' websites + + The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to +access them, you should do this after your first reboot. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a07631c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +
+ + + Konfiguri X, grafik-karton kaj monitoron + + + + + + + + + + Ne gravas kiun grafikan medion (ankaŭ konata kiel labortabla medio) vi +elektis por ĉi tiu instalo de Magejo, ili ĉiuj +baziĝas sur grafika uzula interfaco nomita X Window +System, aŭ simple X. Do cele al bona funkciado +de KDE, GNOME, LXDE +aŭ iu alia grafika medio, la jena konfiguro de X devas +esti ĝusta. Elektu la ĝustan konfiguron se vi rimarkas ke +DrakX ne elektis konfiguron aŭ vi pensas ke tiu +elekto estas malĝusta. + + + + Grafik-karto : Elektu vian +karton en la listo se bezonate. + + + + Ekrano: Vi povas elekti +"Plug'n Play" siakaze aŭ elekti vian monitoron en la +Vendista aŭ Ĝenerala listo. Elektu +Akomodata se vi preferas permane starigi la +horizontalan kaj vertikalan refreŝ-datumon de via monitoro. + + + Malĝustaj refreŝ-datumoj povas damaĝi vian monitoron + + + + + Distingivo: Starigu la deziratan +distingivon kaj kolorprofundon de via monitoro ĉi tie. + + + + Testo: La testo-butono ne ĉiam +aperas dum la instalo. Se la butono estas tie, vi povas testi vian +konfiguron premante ĝin. Se vi vidas demandon demandantan vin ĉu via +konfiguro ĝustas, vi povas respondi "jes" kaj la konfiguro estos +konservita. Se vi vidas nenion vi revenos al konfigur-ekrano kaj povos +rekonfiguri ĉion ĝis kiam la testo sukcesos. Certiĝu pri tio ke +via konfiguro estas ĝusta se la testo-butono ne estas disponebla + + + + Opcioj: Ĉi tie vi povas aktvigi +aŭ malaktivigi kelkajn elektojn. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ef4904a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Choosing your Monitor + + + DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually +correctly identify yours. + + + Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage +your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing +what you are doing. If in doubt you should consult your monitor +documentation + + + + + + Custom + + This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh +rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the +screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are +displayed. + + It is VERY IMPORTANT that you do not specify a monitor +type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you +may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and +consult your monitor documentation. + + Plug 'n Play + + This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the +monitor database. + + Vendor + + If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which +one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: + + vendor + + + + the monitor manufacturers name + + + + the monitor description + + + + Generic + + selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as +1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is +often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver +when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it +may be wise to be conservative in your selections. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..779b3cda --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Agordi subdiskon per DiskDrake + + + + + + + + + + Se vi volas utiligi ĉifradon en via subdisko / vi devas +havi apartan subdiskon /boot. La ĉifrada elekto por la +subdisko /boot ne devas esti selektita, alie via sistemo +ne startos. + + + Agordu via(j)n disko(j)n ĉi tie. Vi povas forigi aŭ krei subdiskojn, ŝanĝi +la dosiersistemon de subdisko aŭ ŝanĝi ĝian grandon kaj eĉ vidi kio estas en +ĝi antaŭ ol komenci. + + + Estas langeto por ĉiu trovita fiksita disko aŭ alispeca stor-aparato kiel +USB-ŝlosilo. Ekzemple sda, sdb kaj sdc se estas tri. + + + Premu Forviŝu ĉion por forigi ĉiujn subdiskojn en la +elektita stor-aparato + + Por aliaj agoj: klaku sur la dezirata subdisko unue. Tiam vi povos vidi ĝin, +elekti dosiersistemon kaj surmetingon, ŝanĝi ĝian grandon aŭ forigi ĝin. + + Daŭrigu ĝis kiam vi agordos ĉion laŭ via deziro. + + Klaku sur Finata kiam vi estos preta.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f39db611 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Kreo de subdiskoj + + + En tiu ĉi ekrano vi povas vidi la enhavon de via(j) stor-aparato(j) kaj la +loko-proponon de DrakX por la instalo de Magejo. + + La disponeblaj elektoj en la suba listo varios depende de la trajtoj kaj +enhavo de via konkreta(j) stor-aparato(j). + + + + + + + Uzu ekzistantajn subdiskojn + + Se tiu elekto estas disponebla oni trovis linuks-akordigeblajn subdiskojn +kiuj povas esti utiligataj por la instalo. + + + + Uzu liberan spacon + + Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en via fiksita disko ĉi tiu elekto uzos ĝin por +nova Mageja instalo. + + + + Uzu la liberan spacon de vindoza subdisko + + Se vi havas neuzitan spacon en ekzistanta vindoza subdisko, la instalilo +povas proponi utiligi ĝin. + + Ĉi tio povas esti utila maniero atingi spacon por via nova Mageja instalo, +sed temas pri riska operacio do vi devus fari sekurec-kopion de ĉiuj gravaj +dosieroj antaŭe! + + Rimarku ke ĉi tio implikas la ŝrumpigon de la vindoza subdisko. La subdisko +devas esti "pura", tio estas Vindozo devis fermiĝi senprobleme la lastan +fojon kiam ĝi estis uzita. Ĝi ankaŭ devas esti malfragmentiĝita kvankam tio +ne estas garantio pri tio ke ĉiuj dosieroj en la subdisko estis movitaj el +la areo uzota. Estas ege rekomendinde realigi sekurec-kopion de viaj +personaj dosieroj. + + + + Forviŝu kaj uzu la tutan diskon. + + Ĉi tiu elekto utiligos la tutan diskon por Magejo. + + Atentu! Ĉi tio forigos ĈIUJN datumojn en la elektita fiksita disko. Estu +zorgema! + + Se vi volas uzi parton de la disko por alia celo aŭ vi havas datumojn en la +disko kiujn vi ne volas perdi, ne elektu ĉi tion. + + + + Subdiskigo + + Ĉi tio havigas al vi plenan kontrolon sur la lokigo de la instalo en via(j) +fiksita(j) disko(j). + + + + + Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the +previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available +hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested +with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 +MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning +tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following +settings: + + "Align to" "MiB" + + "Free space preceding (MiB)" "2" + + Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f70f8f7c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +
+ + + Gratulon + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Finiĝis la instalado kaj konfigurado de Magejo +kaj nun vi povas sekure eltiri la instal-medion kaj reŝarĝi vian komputilon. + + Post tiu reŝarĝo, en la ŝarĝila ekrano vi povos elekti kiun operacian +sistemon lanĉi (se vi havas pli ol unu). + + Se vi ne ŝanĝis la preferojn de la ŝarĝilo, Magejo estos aŭtomate elektita +kaj ŝarĝita. + + Ĝuu! + + Vizitu www.mageia.org se vi havas demandojn aŭ volas kontribui al Magejo + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a6590f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +
+ + + Strukturi subdiskojn + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Ĉi tie vi povas elekti kiu(j)n subdisko(j)n vi ŝatus strukturi. Iu ajn +datumo en subdisko(j) ne markita(j) por strukturado +estos savita. + + Kutime almenaŭ la subdiskoj elektitaj de DrakX bezonos strukturon + + Klaku sur Progresinta por elekti subdiskojn kie vi +ŝatus kontroli ĉu ekzistas difektitaj blokoj + + + Se vi ne certas ĉu vi faris la ĝustan elekton, vi povas klaki sur +Antaŭa, denove sur Antaŭa kaj +tiam sur subdiskigo por reveni al la ĉefa ekrano. En +tiu ekrano vi havas elekton por vidi kio estas en viaj subdiskoj. + + + Se vi estas certa pri la elekto, klaku sur Sekvanta +por daŭrigi. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7b8f9dc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + +
Ĝisdatigoj + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Ekde la publikigo de ĉi tiu versio de Magejo, +pluraj pakaĵoj estis probable ĝisdatigitaj aŭ plibonigitaj. + + Elektu jes se vi deziras elŝuti kaj instali ilin, +elektu ne se vi ne volas fari tion nun aŭ se vi ne +havas retaliron + + Klaku sur Sekvanta por daŭrigi + +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/installer.xml b/docs/installer/eo/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0fa00a76 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +DrakX, la instalilo de Magejo + + + Se vi estas nova aŭ nesperta uzulo de GNU/Linukso, la instalilo de Magejo +estas desegnita por igi vian instaladon aŭ ĝisdatigon tiel facila kiel eble. + + + + +La komenca menua ekrano havas plurajn elektojn, tamen defaŭlte lanĉiĝos la +mageja instalilo, kiu kutime havos ĉion kion oni bezonas. + +
+ + Bonveniga instal-ekrano + +
+ + Se okazus problemoj dum la instalado, tiam povus esti necese uzi specialajn +instalajn elektojn, vidu . + +
+ + La instal-paŝoj + + + La instal-procezo dividiĝas en serio da paŝoj, kiuj povas esti sekvataj per +la flanka panelo de la ekrano. + + Ĉiu paŝo havas unu aŭ pliajn ekranojn kiuj povas ankaŭ havi +Progresintan butonon kun aldonaj sed malofte +bezonataj elektoj. + + La plimulto el ekranoj havas butonon pri Helpo +havigantan pliajn karigojn pri tiu paŝo. + + + Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon, +sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe. Post la formatigo de partigo aŭ post +la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi ĝin +povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio ke +vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn +Alt Ctrl F2 samtempe. Post tio, premu Alt +Ctrl Delete samtempe por reŝarĝi. + +
+ +
+ + Instal-elektoj + + + Se la instalo malsukcesas tiam povas esti necese provi denove kaj uzi unu el +la aldonaj elektoj aperontaj per la premo de la klavo F1 (Helpo), vidu + + Ĉi tio malfermos la jenan teksto-bazitan helpon. + +
+ + Instala helpo-ekrano + +
+ +
+ + Instal-problemoj kaj eblaj solvoj + + +
+ + Sen grafika interfaco + + + + + Post la komenca ekrano vi eble ne alvenos al la ekrano pri +lingvo-selekto. Ĉi tio povas okazi kun kelkaj grafik-kartoj kaj malnovaj +maŝinoj. Provu utiligi malaltan rezolucion per la tajpo de "vgalo" en la +komand-linio. + + + + Se la aparataro estas tre malnova, grafika instalo povas esti neebla. Ĉikaze +povas esti rekomendinde provi teksto-bazitan instalon. Por tio premu la +klavon ESC en la unua bonveniga ekrano kaj konfirmu per ENTER. Tiam aperos +nigra ekrano kun la vorto "boot:". Tajpu "text" kaj premu ENTER. Nun +daŭrigu la instaladon tekste. + + +
+ +
+ + Instal-paneoj + + + Se la sistemo ŝajnas panei dum la instalo, tio povas esti pro +aparatar-detekta problemo. Ĉikaze la aŭtomata detektado de aparatoj povas +esti prokrastita. Por provi tion tajpu noauto en la +komando-linio. Ĉi tiu elekto povas ankaŭ esti miksita kun la antaŭa se estas +necese. +
+ +
+ + Kernaj elektoj + + + Ili estos malofte necesaj, sed en kelkaj kazoj la aparataro povas kalkuli la +disponeblan ĉefmemoron malĝuste. Por konkretigi ĝin permane vi povas utiligi +la parametron mem=xxxM, kie xxx estas la ĝusta kvanto da ĉefmemoro. Ekzemple +"mem=256M" specifus 256MB-ojn el ĉefmemoro. +
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89717151 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +
+ + Media Selection (Nonfree) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are +available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories +selection determines which packages will be available for selection during +the next steps. + + + + The Core repository cannot be disabled as it contains +the base of the distribution. + + + + The Non-free repository includes packages that are +free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain +closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this +repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, +firmware for various WiFi cards, etc. + + + + The Tainted repository includes packages released under +a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is +that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, +e.g. Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages +needed to play commercial video DVD, etc. + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bcb85acf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +
+ + + + Minimuma instalo + + + + + + Vi povas elekti Minimuman Instalon malselektante ĉion en la Pakaĵara Elekta +ekrano, vidu . + Minimuma Instalo celas konkretajn uzojn por Magejo kiel servilojn aŭ +specialigitajn laborstaciojn. Probable vi uzos ĉi tiun elekton kune kun +Permana Pakaĵ-elekto, vidu . + Se vi elektas ĉi tian instalon la venonta ekrano proponos al vi instali +plurajn utilajn aldonaĵojn kiel dokumentojn aŭ Ikso-servilon. + + + + + +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3088fc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ +
+ + Diversaj parametroj + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + DrakX faris inteligentajn antaŭelektojn por la konfiguro de via sistemo +dependante de tio kion vi elektis kaj la aparataro kiun ĝi mem eltrovis. Vi +povas kontroli la konfigurojn ĉi tie kaj ŝanĝi ilin se vi volas klakante sur +Konfiguru. + +
+ + Sistemaj parametroj + + + + + Horzono + + DrakX elektis tempo-zonon por vi, dependante de via preferata lingvo. Vi +povas ŝanĝi ĝin se bezonate. Vidu ankaŭ + + + + Lando + + Se vi ne troviĝas en la selektita lando, estas tre grave ke vi korektu ĝin. +Vidu + + + + Startŝarĝilo + + DrakX faris bonajn elektojn por la konfiguro de la sistema ŝarĝilo. + + Ŝanĝu nenion se vi ne scias kiel konfiguri Grub kaj/aŭ Lilo + + Por plia informo vidu + + + + Uzula administrado (User management) + + Vi povas aldoni pliajn uzulojn ĉi tie. Ĉiuj havos sian propran dosierujon +/home. + + + + Servoj: + + Sistemaj servoj celas tiujn malgrandajn programojn funkciantajn fone +(demonoj). Ĉi tiu ilo ebligos vin aktivigi aŭ malaktivigi diversajn taskojn. + + Vi devus kontroli zorgeme antaŭ ol ŝanĝi ion ĉi tie - eraro povus okazigi ke +via komputilo ne funkciu ĝuste. + + For more information, see + + +
+ +
+ + Aparatar-parametroj + + + + + Klavaro: + + Ĉi tie vi konfiguras aŭ ŝanĝas vian klavar-agordon kiu dependas de via +lando, lingvo aŭ klavar-speco. + + + + Muso: + + Ĉi tie vi povas aldoni aŭ konfiguri aliajn indikajn aparatojn, tabuletojn, +mov-globojn, ktp. + + + + Son-karto : + + Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin agordi vian son-karton. En la plimulto el okazoj +la selektitaj elektoj funkcios en via komputilo. + + + + Grafika interfaco: + + Ĉi tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian grafik-karto(j)n kaj montrilo(j)n. + + Por plia informo vidu . + + + + + +
+ +
+ + Retaj parametroj + + + + + Reto: + + Vi povas konfiguri vian reton ĉi tie, sed por ret-kartoj utiligantaj +neliberajn pelilojn estas plibone fari tion post la reŝarĝo de la sistemo +per Mageja Konfigurilo . Por tio vi devos +aktivigi la neliberajn deponejojn. + + + Kiam vi aldonas ret-karton ne forgesu konfiguri vian fajronŝirmilon por ke +ĝi kontrolu ankaŭ tiun ret-interfacon. + + + + + Prokuraj serviloj: + + Prokura servilo funkcias kiel peranto inter via komputilo kaj interreto. Ĉi +tiu sekcio ebligas vin konfiguri vian komputilon por utiligi prokuran +servon. + + Eble vi devas konsulti vian ret-mastrumanton por scii la parametrojn kiujn +vi devas enigi ĉi tie + + +
+ +
+ + Sekureco + + + + + Sekurec-nivelo : + + Ĉi tie vi starigas la sekurec-nivelon por via komputilo, en la plimulto el +okazoj la defaŭlta konfiguro estas adekvata por ĝenerala uzo. + + Aktivigu la elekton pli adekvatan laŭ viaj bezonoj. + + + + Fajroŝirmilo (Fajromuro): + + Fajroŝirmilo celas esti bariero inter viaj gravaj datumoj kaj la friponoj en +la reto kiuj volas kompromiti aŭ forŝteli ilin. + + Elektu la servojn kiuj devas havi aliron al via sistemo. Viaj elektoj +dependos de tio por kio vi utiligas la komputilon. + + + Rimarku ke ebligi ĉion (sen fajroŝirmilo) povas esti tre riska. + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..652765d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Grando-ŝanĝo de la subdisko +<application>Vindoza<superscript>®</superscript></application> + + + Vi havas pli ol unu +Vindoza® subdisko. +Elektu kiu devus esti malgrandigita cele al liberigo de spaco por la instalo +de Magejo. + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b4eba1a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + +
+ + + + Sekurec-nivelo + + + + + + + + + + + + Vi povas alĝustigi vian sekurec-nivelon ĉi tie. + + Lasu la defaŭltan konfiguron senŝanĝe se vi ne scias kion elekti. + + Post la instalo, ĉiam eblos alĝustigi la sekurec-konfiguron en la fako +Sekureco en la Mageja Kontrolilo. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70dfa83f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + +
+ + + + + Elektu vian Landon / Regionon + + + + + + + + + + + + + Selektu vian landon aŭ regionon. Ĉi tio estas grava por ĉiaj konfiguroj, +kiel la monero kaj senkabla reguliga domajno. Konfiguri eraran landon povus +kaŭzi ke vi ne kapablu utiligi senkablan reton. + + Se via lando ne estas en la listo, klaku sur la butono Aliaj +Landoj kaj elektu vian landon / regionon tie. + + + Se via lando estas nur en la listo Aliaj Landoj, post +klaki sur Enorde povas ŝajni ke vi elektis landon de +la unua listo. Bv. ignori tion, DrakX daŭrigos kun via reala elekto. + + +
+ + + Enir-metodo + + + En la ekrano Aliaj Landoj vi povas ankaŭ elekti +enir-metodon (sube en la listo). Enir-metodoj ebligas uzulojn tajpi +mult-lingvajn literojn (ĉina, japana, korea, ktp.). IBus estas la defaŭlta +enir-metodo en Magejaj DVD, kaj en Afrikaj/Barataj kaj Aziaj/ne-Barataj +KD. Por aziaj kaj afrikaj tajp-konfiguroj, IBus agordos la defaŭltan +enir-metodon aŭtomate tiel uzuloj ne bezonos konfiguri ĝin permane. Aliaj +enir-metodoj (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, ktp.) ankaŭ havigas similajn funkciojn kaj +povas esti instalitaj se vi aldonis HTTP/FTP-an medion antaŭ la pakaĵa +selekto. + + + Se vi nevole preterpaŝis la enir-metodon dum la instalo, vi povas aliri ĝin +post ŝarĝi la instalitan sistemon per "Konfiguri vian Komputilon" -> +"Sistemo" aŭ lanĉante localdrake kiel mastrumanto. + +
+
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1053642 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Instalado/ĝisdatigo + + + + + + + + Instalado + + Uzu tiun elekton por freŝa instalado de Magejo . + + + + Ĝisdatigu + + Se vi havas unu aŭ pliajn ekzistantajn instalojn de +Magejo en via sistemo, la instalilo ebligos vin +ĝisdatigi unu el ili al la plej lasta versio. + + + + + Se iam dum la instalado vi decidas haltigi ĝin, eblas reŝarĝi la komputilon, +sed bv. pripensi tion dufoje antaŭe. Post la strukturado de subdisko aŭ +post la ekinstalo de ĝisdatigo via komputilo ne plu restos egale, reŝarĝi +ĝin povus igi vian sistemon neuzebla. Se malgraŭ tio vi estas certa pri tio +ke vi volas reŝarĝi, malfermu teksto-terminalon premante la tri klavojn +Alt Ctrl F2 samtempe. Post tio, premu Alt +Ctrl Delete samtempe por reŝarĝi. + + + + Se vi rimarkas ke vi forgesis selekti aldonan lingvon, vi povas reveni el la +ekrano "Instalado/ĝisdatigo" al la ekrano por lingva elekto per la premo de +Alt Ctrl Home. Ne faru tion poste +en la instalo. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..856c287b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + +Klavaro + + + DrakX selektas adekvatan klavaron por via lingvo. Se ne estas disponebla ĝi +aŭtomate elektos usonan klavaron. + + + + + + + Estu certa pri tio ke la selekto estas ĝusta aŭ elektu male alian +klavaron. Se vi ne scias kiun klavaron vi havas rigardu la specifojn kiuj +venas kun via sistemo aŭ demandu al la vendisto. Eble estas etikedo sur la +klavaro kiu identigas ĝin. Vi ankaŭ povas rigardi ĉi tie: eo.wikipedia.org/wiki/Klavarfasono + + + + Se via klavaro ne estas en la montrita listo klaku sur la butono +Pli (Plu) por aliri etenditan liston kaj selektu vian +klavaron tie. + + + Post elekti klavaron per la butono Pli (Plu) , vi +revenos al la unua priklavara ekrano sed povos ŝajni kvazaŭ klavaro de tiu +ekrano estas elektita. Vi povas sentime ignori tiun anomalion kaj daŭrigi la +instaladon: Via klavaro estas tiu kiun vi elektis per la etendita listo. + + + + + Se vi elektis klavaron nebazitan sur latinaj literoj, vi vidos aldonan +ekranon demandantan kiel vi ŝatus ŝanĝi inter latinaj kaj nelatinaj klavaroj + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf6e03a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Bv. elekti la uzotan lingvon + + + Selektu vian preferatan lingvon unue per la disfaldo de via kontinenta +listo. Magejo uzos ĉi tiun selekton dum la +instalado kaj por la instalita sistemo. + + Se vi bezonas instali en via sistemo plurajn lingvojn por vi aŭ aliaj +uzuloj, tiam vi devas utiligi la butonon Multaj lingvoj (Multiple +languages) por aldoni ilin nun. Estos malfacile aldoni plian +lingvan eltenon post la instalo. + + + + + + Se vi elektas pli ol unu lingvon, vi devas selekti unu el ili kiel vian +preferatan lingvon en la komenca lingva ekrano. Ĝi markiĝos ankaŭ en la +plurlingva ekrano . + + + + + Se via klavara lingvo ne estas la sama kiel via preferata lingvo, tiam estas +rekomendinde instali la lingvon de via klavaro ankaŭ. + + + + Magejo uzas UTF-8 (Unikodon) defaŭlte. Ĉi tio povas esti malŝaltita en la +plurlingva ekrano se vi certas pri tio ke ĝi estas neadekvata por via +lingvo. Malŝalti unikodon havos konsekvencojn sur ĉiuj instalitaj lingvoj. + + + + Vi povas ŝanĝi la lingvon de via sistemo post la instalo per la Kontrolilo +de Magejo -> Sistemo -> Agordi skrib-sistemojn. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ae7ff9d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +
+ + + Selekti muson + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Se vin ne kontentigas la funkciado de via muso, vi povas elekti iun malsaman +ĉi tie. + + Ofte, Universala - Ajna PS/2- kaj +USB-musoj estas bona elekto. + + Selektu Universalan - Trudi evdev +por konfiguri la butonojn kiuj ne funkcias en muso kun ses aŭ pli butonoj. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3f0fa3a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +
+ + Lanĉilaj ĉefaj elektoj + + + + + + + + + Se vi preferas malsaman lanĉilan konfiguron al tiu elektita aŭtomate fare de +la instalilo, vi povas ŝanĝi ĝin ĉi tie. + + Eble vi havas jam alian operacian sistemon en via maŝino, tiukaze vi devas +decidi ĉu vi volas aldoni Magejon al via ekzistanta lanĉilo aŭ ebligi al +Magejo krei novan. + + + La grafika menuo de Magejo estas bela :) + + +
+ + Uzi la lanĉilon de Magejo + + + Defaŭlte Magejo skribas novan GRUB-lanĉilon en la MBR de via unua fiksita +disko. Se vi jam havas aliajn operaciajn sistemojn, Magejo provos aldoni +ilin al via nova Mageja lanĉilo. + + Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB +legacy and Lilo. + + + Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by +GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is +used. + + The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at +the Summary page during installation. + +
+ +
+ + Uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon + + + Se vi decidas uzi ekzistantan lanĉilon tiam vi devos klaki sur la lanĉila +butono Konfiguru, kiu ebligos vin ŝanĝi la +instal-lokon de la lanĉilo. + + Ne selektu aparaton kiel "sda" aŭ vi anstataŭigos la ekzistantan MBR. Vi +devas selekti la saman radikan subdiskon kiun vi elektis dum la subdiskigo, +ekzemple sda7. + + Klarigcele, sda estas aparato, sda7 subdisko. + + + Iru al tty2 per la premo de Ctrl+Alt+F2 kaj tajpu df por +vidi kie estas via radika subdisko /. Ctrl+Alt+F7 venigos +vin ree al la instal-ekrano. + + + La ĝusta procezo por aldoni vian Magejan sistemon al ekzistanta lanĉilo +estas preter la celo de tiu ĉi helpilo, tamen en la plimulto el la kazoj +estos necese lanĉi lanĉilan instal-programon kiu devus detekti kaj konfiguri +ĝin aŭtomate. Vidu la dokumentaron por la konkreta operacia sistemo. +
+ +
+ + Lanĉila sperta elekto + + + Se vi havas tre limigitan spacon en via disko por subdisko +/ enhavanta samtempe la dosierujon +/tmp, klaku sur Progresinta kaj +aktivigu la skatolon dirantan Purigu /tmp dum ĉiuj +startadoj. Tio helpos teni iom da libera spaco. +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8e37f8f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + +
Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry + + + + + + + + + You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the +relevant button in the Bootloader Configuration screen +and editing the screen that pops up on top of it. + + + + + + Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an +entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one. + You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely. + The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a +choice while booting up. +Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't +just try something without knowing what you are doing. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..51a7f071 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + +
+ + + Konfiguri SCSI + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + DrakX kutime trovas fiksitajn diskojn senprobleme. Ĝi tamen povas ne trovi +kelkajn malnovajn SCSI-aparatojn kaj do malsukcesi pri la instalado de la +bezonataj peliloj. + + Se tio okazas, vi devos permane diri al Drakx kiun SCSI-aparaton vi havas. + + DrakX devus tiam esti kapabla konfiguri la aparato(j)n ĝuste. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..122889ca --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/eo/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +
+ + + Confirm hard disk to be formatted + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Click on Previous if you are not sure about your +choice. + + Click on Next if you are sure and want to erase every +partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/makedoc.sh b/docs/installer/makedoc.sh index 32e8db25..a3802cb6 100755 --- a/docs/installer/makedoc.sh +++ b/docs/installer/makedoc.sh @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ for doc in acceptLicense addUser ask_mntpoint_s installer selectInstallClass \ configureX_card_list configureX_monitor configureX_chooser \ setupBootloaderAddEntry minimal-install securityLevel selectCountry media_selection add_supplemental_media; do - po4a-translate -k 50 --format docbook --master-charset utf-8 --localized-charset utf-8 \ + po4a-translate -k 1 --format docbook --master-charset utf-8 --localized-charset utf-8 \ --master en/${doc}.xml \ --po $LANG.po --localized $LANG/${doc}.xml perl -i -p -e "s/version=\"5\.0\"/version=\"5\.0\" xml:lang=\"$LANG\"/;" $LANG/${doc}.xml diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR.po b/docs/installer/pt_BR.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9521fa5a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR.po @@ -0,0 +1,3295 @@ +# Brazilian Portuguese translation of Mageia Installer Help +# Copyright (C) 2013 Mageia Documentation Team +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Installer Help\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-05-16 20:28+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: Brazilian Portuguese \n" +"Language: pt_BR\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. type: Content of:
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:32 +msgid "License and Release Notes" +msgstr "Licenças e Notas de Lançamento" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:45 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "Acordo de Licença" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license " +"terms and conditions carefully." +msgstr "" +"Antes de instalar a <application>Mageia</application>, por favor, leia os " +"termos e condições da licença cuidadosamente." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51 +msgid "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</" +"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue." +msgstr "" +"Estes termos e condições aplicam-se à distribuição <application>Mageia</" +"application> toda e deve ser aceita antes para que você possa continuar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:55 +msgid "" +"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"Para aceitar, basta selecionar <guilabel>Aceitar</guilabel> e, em seguida, " +"clique em <guibutton>Avançar</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:58 +msgid "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. " +"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer." +msgstr "" +"Se você decidir não aceitar essas condições, então agradecemos a procura. " +"Clicando <guibutton>Sair</guibutton> irá reiniciar seu computador." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:68 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "Notas de Lançamento" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:75 +msgid "" +"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, " +"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" +"Para ver o que há de novo nesta versão da <application>Mageia</application>, " +"clique no botão <guibutton>Notas de Lançamento</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:4 +msgid "User and Superuser Management" +msgstr "Gerenciador de Usuário e Superusuário" + +#. Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but +#. changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing +#. about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or +#. disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous +#. screen), marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand +#. "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? +#. JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading +#. marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot +#. marja 2013-04-26 added new note +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/addUser.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:34 +msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:" +msgstr "Definir senha do administrador (root):" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:38 +msgid "" +"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to " +"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the " +"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the " +"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green " +"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are " +"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped " +"the first password by comparing them." +msgstr "" +"É aconselhável para todas as instalações <application>Mageia</application> " +"definir um superusuário e a senha do administrador, normalmente chamado a " +"<emphasis>senha de root</emphasis> no Linux. A medida que você digite uma " +"senha na caixa de cima, a cor de seu escudo vai mudar de vermelho para " +"amarelo para verde, dependendo da força da senha. Um escudo verde mostra que " +"você está usando uma senha forte. Você precisa repetir a mesma senha na " +"caixa logo abaixo da primeira caixa de senha, verificando se você não tiver " +"digitado corretamente a primeira senha, comparando-as." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:48 +msgid "" +"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." +msgstr "" +"Todas as senhas são \"case sensitive\" (diferenciam entre letras maiúsculas " +"e minusculas), o melhor é usar uma mistura de letras (maiúsculas e " +"minúsculas), números e outros caracteres em uma senha." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:56 +msgid "Enter a user" +msgstr "Digite um usuário" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:59 +msgid "" +"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but " +"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and " +"anything else the average user does with his computer" +msgstr "" +"Adicionar um usuário aqui. Um usuário tem menos direitos do que o " +"superusuário (root), mas o suficiente para navegar na internet, usar " +"aplicativos de escritório ou jogar jogos e qualquer outra coisa que o " +"usuário médio faz com o seu computador." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the " +"users icon." +msgstr "" +"<guibutton>Ícone</guibutton>: se você clicar neste botão irá mudar o ícone " +"de usuários." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:70 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text " +"box." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Nome real</guilabel>: Insira o nome de usuários reais na caixa de " +"texto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:75 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let " +"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case " +"sensitive.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>nome de Login</guilabel>: Aqui você digita o nome de login do " +"usuário ou deixe DrakX usar uma versão do nome do usuário real. O nome de " +"login é \"case sensitive\"." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:81 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user " +"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the " +"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Senha</guilabel>: Nesta caixa de texto você deve digitar a senha " +"do usuário. Existe um escudo no final da caixa de texto que indica a força " +"da senha. (Veja também <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:87 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this " +"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user " +"password text boxes." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Senha (novamente)</guilabel>: Redigite a senha do usuário na caixa " +"de texto e Drakx irá verificar se você digitou a mesma senha em cada uma das " +"caixas de texto de senha do usuário." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:94 +msgid "" +"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but " +"write protected) home directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:97 +msgid "" +"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - " +"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that " +"is both read and write protected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:101 +msgid "" +"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised " +"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:105 +msgid "" +"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all " +"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step " +"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:109 +msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:116 +msgid "Advanced User Management" +msgstr "Gerenciamento Avançado de Usuários" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:119 +msgid "" +"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a " +"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. " +"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account." +msgstr "" +"Se o botão <guibutton>avançado</guibutton> é clicado, é oferecido a você uma " +"tela que permite que você edite as configurações do usuário que você está " +"adicionando. Além disso, você pode ativar ou desativar uma conta de " +"convidado." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account " +"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest " +"should save his important files to a USB key." +msgstr "" +"Qualquer coisa que um convidado com uma conta de convidado padrão " +"<emphasis>rbash</emphasis> salva em seu diretório <literal>/home</literal> " +"será apagada quando ele sair. O usuário convidado deve salvar seus arquivos " +"importantes em um pendrive USB." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a " +"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, " +"but he has more restricted access than normal users." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Ativar conta de convidado</guilabel>: Aqui você pode ativar ou " +"desativar uma conta de convidado. A conta de convidado permite que um " +"convidado acessar e usar o PC, mas ele tem acesso mais restrito do que os " +"usuários normais." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:138 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the " +"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are " +"Bash, Dash and Sh" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: Esta lista suspensa permite que você altere o " +"shell usado pelo usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior, as " +"opções são Bash, Dash e Sh." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:144 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you " +"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless " +"you know what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>ID de usuário</guilabel>: Aqui você pode definir o ID de usuário " +"para o usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior. Este é um número. " +"Deixe em branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID. Also a " +"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know " +"what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>ID de Grupo</guilabel>: Isso permite que você defina o ID do " +"grupo. Também um número, normalmente o mesmo que para o utilizador. Deixe em " +"branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:11 +msgid "Choose the mount points" +msgstr "Escolha os pontos de montagem" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" +#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) +#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes +#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans +#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it +#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) +#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountpoints-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you " +"can change the mount points." +msgstr "" +"Aqui você vê as partições Linux que foram encontrados em seu computador. Se " +"você não concorda com as sugestões do <application>DrakX</application>, você " +"pode alterar os pontos de montagem." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> " +"(root) partition." +msgstr "" +"Se você mudar alguma coisa, certifique-se de ainda ter uma partição " +"<literal>/</literal> (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point" +"\", \"Type\")." +msgstr "" +"Cada partição é mostrada como segue: \"Dispositivo\" (\"Capacidade\", " +"\"Ponto de montagem\", \"Tipo\")." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49 +msgid "" +"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], " +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")." +msgstr "" +"\"Dispositivo\", é composto de: \"disco rígido\", [\"número do disco rígido" +"\" (letra)], \"número da partição\" (por exemplo, \"sda5\")." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55 +msgid "" +"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from " +"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> " +"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for " +"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store " +"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</" +"literal> partition of a cauldron install." +msgstr "" +"Se você tiver várias partições, você pode escolher vários pontos de montagem " +"diferentes a partir de um menu rolante (drop-down), como <literal>/</" +"literal>, <literal>/home</literal> e <literal>/var</literal>. Você mesmo " +"pode fazer seus próprios pontos de montagem, por exemplo <literal>/video</" +"literal> para uma partição onde você deseja armazenar seus filmes, ou " +"<literal>/cauldron-home</literal> para a partição <literal>/home</literal> " +"de uma instalação caldeirão (versão da Mageia em desenvolvimento)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:65 +msgid "" +"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount " +"point field blank." +msgstr "" +"Para partições que você não precisa ter acesso, você pode deixar o campo do " +"ponto de montagem em branco." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:71 +msgid "" +"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, " +"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen " +"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size." +msgstr "" +"Escolha a opção <guibutton>Anterior</guibutton> se você não tiver certeza do " +"que escolher, e em seguida, assinale o <guilabel>Personalização do " +"particionamento de disco</guilabel>. Na tela seguinte você pode clicar em " +"uma partição para ver seu tipo e tamanho." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) " +"DrakX suggests, or more." +msgstr "" +"Se você tiver certeza que os pontos de montagem estão corretos, clique em " +"<guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> e escolha se você só quiser formatar a(s) " +"partição(s) que o DrakX sugere, ou mais." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:18 +msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" +msgstr "DrakX, o Instalador da Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:21 +msgid "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." +msgstr "" +"Se você é novo no GNU-Linux ou um usuário experiente, o Instalador da Mageia " +"foi feito para ajudar a fazer sua instalação ou atualização tão fácil quando " +"possível." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:29 +msgid "" +"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will " +"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need." +msgstr "" +"A tela do menu inicial tem várias opções, porém a opção padrão irá iniciar o " +"instalador, que será, normalmente, tudo o que você irá precisar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:35 +msgid "Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "Primeira Tela da Instalação" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:39 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/installer.xml:34 en/installer.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use " +"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></" +"xref>." +msgstr "" +"Se houver problemas durante a instalação, então pode ser necessário usar " +"opções de instalação especiais, consulte <xref linkend=\"installationOptions" +"\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:52 +msgid "The installation steps" +msgstr "As etapas de instalação" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed " +"on the side panel of the screen." +msgstr "" +"O processo de instalação é dividido em um número de passos, o que pode ser " +"seguido no painel lateral da tela." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options." +msgstr "" +"Cada passo tem uma ou mais telas que também podem ter botões " +"<guibutton>Avançados</guibutton> com opções extras, menos comumente " +"necessárias." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further " +"explanations about the current step." +msgstr "" +"A maioria das telas tem botões de <guibutton>Ajuda</guibutton> que contém " +"explicações sobre a etapa atual." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/installer.xml:66 +msgid "" +"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is " +"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure " +"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" +"Se em algum momento durante a instalação, você decidir interromper a " +"instalação, é possível reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de " +"fazer isso. Uma vez que a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações " +"começaram a ser instaladas, o computador não está mais no mesmo estado e " +"reiniciar ele poderá deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar disto, " +"você está muito certo de que reiniciar é o que você quer, vá para um " +"terminal de texto e pressione as três teclas <guibutton> Ctrl Alt F2 </" +"guibutton> ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso, pressione <guibutton>Ctrl Alt " +"Delete</guibutton> simultaneamente, para reiniciar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:80 +msgid "Installation options" +msgstr "Opções de Instalação" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:83 +msgid "" +"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one " +"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</" +"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>" +msgstr "" +"Se a instalação falhar, então pode ser necessário tentar de novo usando uma " +"das opções extras disponíveis pressionando <guibutton>F1 (Help)</guibutton>. " +"Veja em <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>Tela de Ajuda da Instalação" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:87 +msgid "This will open the following text based help." +msgstr "Isto abrirá o seguinte ajuda em modo texto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:91 +msgid "Installation Help Screen" +msgstr "Tela de Ajuda da Instalação" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:105 +msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" +msgstr "Problemas de Instalação e Possíveis Soluções" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:111 +msgid "No Graphical Interface" +msgstr "Sem Interface Gráfica" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:116 +msgid "" +"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. " +"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low " +"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt." +msgstr "" +"Após a tela inicial, você não chegou na tela de seleção de idioma. Isto " +"pode acontecer com algumas placas de vídeos e sistemas antigos. Tente usar " +"uma resolução baixa teclando <code>vgalo</code> na tela de prompt (modo-" +"texto)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit " +"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be " +"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit " +"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"Se o hardware é muito antigo, uma instalação gráfica pode não ser possível. " +"Neste caso, vale a pena tentar uma instalação em modo de texto. Para usar " +"esta opção, tecle ESC na primeira tela de boas-vindas e confirme com ENTER. " +"Aparecerá para você uma tela preta com a palavra \"boot:\". Tecle \"text\" e " +"clique ENTER. Agora continue com a instalação em modo-texto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:135 +msgid "The Install Freezes" +msgstr "A Instalação Congela" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:138 +msgid "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of " +"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with " +"other options as necessary." +msgstr "" +"Se o sistema parece congelar durante a instalação, isto pode ser um problema " +"com a detecção de hardware. Neste caso, a detecção automática de hardware " +"pode ser ignorada e tratada mais tarde. Para tentar desta forma, tecle " +"<code>noauto</code> no prompt (tela modo-texto). Esta opção pode também ser " +"combinada com outras opções, conforme necessário." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:147 +msgid "Kernel Options" +msgstr "Opções do Kernel" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:150 +msgid "" +"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e." +"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM." +msgstr "" +"Estas raramente serão necessárias, mas em alguns casos, o hardware pode " +"relatar a memória RAM disponível de forma incorreta. Para especificar isso " +"manualmente, você pode usar o parâmetro <code>mem=xxxM</code>, onde xxx é o " +"a correta quantidade de RAM. Por exemplo <code>mem=256M</code> irá " +"especificar 256MB de RAM." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:23 +msgid "Install or Upgrade" +msgstr "Instalar ou atualizar" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:34 +msgid "Install" +msgstr "Instalar" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:36 +msgid "" +"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation." +msgstr "" +"Utilize esta opção para uma nova instalação <application>Mageia</" +"application>. ." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41 +msgid "Upgrade" +msgstr "Atualizar" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43 +msgid "" +"If you have one or more <application>Mageia 2</application> installations on " +"your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the " +"latest release." +msgstr "" +"Se você tem uma ou mais instalações da <application>Mageia 2</application> " +"em seu sistema, o instalador irá permitir que você atualize uma delas para a " +"última versão." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to " +"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been " +"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in " +"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an " +"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you " +"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl " +"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</" +"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" +"Se durante a instalação você decidir interromper a instalação, é possível " +"reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de fazer isso. Uma vez que " +"a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações começaram a ser instaladas, " +"o computador não estará mais no mesmo estado e reiniciar ele poderia muito " +"bem deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar isso, você está muito " +"certo de você quer reiniciar, vá para um terminal de texto, pressione as " +"três teclas <guilabel>Alt Ctrl F2</guilabel>, ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso, " +"pressione <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</guilabel> simultaneamente para " +"reiniciar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice " +"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</" +"emphasis> do this later in the install." +msgstr "" +"Se você descobriu que você esqueceu de selecionar um idioma adicional, você " +"pode retornar a partir da tela \"Instalar ou Atualizar\" para a tela de " +"escolha de idioma pressionando <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. " +"<emphasis>Não</emphasis> faça isso mais tarde na instalação." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:14 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "Teclado" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:17 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." +msgstr "" +"DrakX seleciona um teclado adequado ao seu idioma. Se nenhum teclado " +"adequado for encontrado, ele será o padrão para um layout de teclado dos EUA." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\" align=\"center\" " +"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" +"Certifique-se que a seleção está correta ou escolha outro layout de teclado. " +"Se você não sabe qual o layout do seu teclado possui, procure nas " +"especificações que acompanham o sistema ou peça ao fornecedor do computador. " +"Pode até haver uma etiqueta no teclado que identifica o layout. Você também " +"pode procurar aqui:<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/" +"Keyboard_layout\">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</" +"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there." +msgstr "" +"Se o seu teclado não está na lista exibida, clique em <guibutton>Mais</" +"guibutton> para obter uma lista completa, e selecionar o seu teclado lá." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45 +msgid "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though " +"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly " +"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the " +"full list." +msgstr "" +"Depois de escolher um teclado a partir do diálogo <guibutton>Mais</" +"guibutton>, você vai voltar para a primeira caixa de diálogo de escolha do " +"teclado e vai parecer que um teclado daquela tela foi escolhido. Você pode " +"ignorar esta anomalia e continuar a instalação: O teclado é aquele que você " +"escolheu da lista completa." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:55 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin " +"and non-Latin keyboard layouts" +msgstr "" +"Se você escolher um teclado baseado em caracteres não latinos, você verá uma " +"tela de diálogo extra perguntando como você prefere alternar entre os " +"layouts de teclados latinos e não latinos." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureServices.xml:12 +msgid "Configure your Services" +msgstr "Configurar os seus serviços" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureServices.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system." +msgstr "" +"Aqui você pode definir quais serviços devem (ou não) começar quando você " +"inicializar seu sistema." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:30 +msgid "" +"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and " +"see all services in it." +msgstr "" +"Há quatro grupos, clique no triângulo diante de um grupo para expandi-lo e " +"ver todos os serviços nele." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:34 +msgid "The setting DrakX chose are usually good." +msgstr "A configuração escolhida pelo DrakX são geralmente boas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." +msgstr "" +"Se você selecionar um serviço, algumas informações sobre ele são mostradas " +"na caixa de informações abaixo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:41 +msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"Apenas mude as coisas quando você sabe muito bem o que você está fazendo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:23 +msgid "Please choose a language to use" +msgstr "Por favor, escolha um idioma para usar" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during " +"the installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" +"Selecione o seu idioma preferido, pela primeira ampliação da lista para o " +"seu continente. A <application>Mageia</application> irá utilizar essa " +"seleção durante a instalação e para o sistema instalado." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:30 +msgid "" +"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your " +"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the " +"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be " +"difficult to add extra language support after installation." +msgstr "" +"Se é provável que você vai exigir vários idiomas instalado em seu sistema, " +"para si ou para outros usuários, então você deve usar o botão " +"<guibutton>Múltiplas linguagens</guibutton> para adicioná-los agora. Vai ser " +"difícil adicionar o suporte a idiomas adicionais após a instalação." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them " +"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be " +"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ." +msgstr "" +"Mesmo se você escolher mais de um idioma, você deve primeiro escolher um " +"deles como seu idioma preferido na primeira tela de idiomas. Também será " +"marcado como escolhido na tela de múltiplos idiomas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:51 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well." +msgstr "" +"Se o idioma do teclado não é o mesmo que o seu idioma preferido, então é " +"aconselhável instalar o idioma do teclado também." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:57 +msgid "" +"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the " +"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your " +"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages." +msgstr "" +"A Mageia usa UTF-8 (Unicode) por padrão. Isso pode ser desativado na tela " +"\"múltiplas linguagens\" se você sabe que é inadequado para o seu idioma. A " +"desativação do UTF-8 se aplicada a todos os idiomas instalados." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:64 +msgid "" +"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia " +"Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system." +msgstr "" +"Você pode alterar o idioma do seu sistema após a instalação no Centro de " +"Controle Mageia -> Sistema -> Gerenciar Localização para o seu Sistema." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:4 +msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" +msgstr "Confirme o disco rígido para ser formatado" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03 +#. test comment - johnr +#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct +#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I +#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD +#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your " +"choice." +msgstr "" +"Clique em <guibutton>Anterior</guibutton> se você não tem certeza sobre sua " +"escolha." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every " +"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk." +msgstr "" +"Clique em <guibutton>Avançar</guibutton> se você tem certeza e deseja apagar " +"todas as partições, cada sistema operacional e todos os dados no disco " +"rígido." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:25 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "Particionamento" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the " +"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install " +"<application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" +"Nesta tela você pode ver o conteúdo do seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s) e ver as " +"soluções que o assistente de particionamento DrakX encontrou para onde " +"instalar <application>Mageia</application>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:33 +msgid "" +"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your " +"particular hard drive(s) layout and content." +msgstr "" +"As opções disponíveis na lista abaixo irão variar, dependendo do layout e do " +"conteúdo específicos do(s) seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" +"\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\" align=\"center" +"\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:45 +msgid "Use Existing Partitions" +msgstr "Utilizar as partições existentes" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:48 +msgid "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." +msgstr "" +"Se esta opção estiver disponível, então partições existentes compatíveis com " +"o Linux foram encontrados e podem ser utilizadas para a instalação." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:54 +msgid "Use Free Space" +msgstr "Usar o espaço livre" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." +msgstr "" +"Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em seu disco rígido, então esta opção irá " +"usá-lo para a sua nova instalação da Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:62 +msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition" +msgstr "Use o espaço livre na partição do Windows" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it." +msgstr "" +"Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em uma partição existente do Windows, o " +"instalador pode oferecer para usá-lo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:69 +msgid "" +"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, " +"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all " +"important files!" +msgstr "" +"Esta pode ser uma maneira útil de obter espaço para a sua nova instalação da " +"Mageia, mas é uma operação arriscada, por isso você deve ter a certeza de " +"ter um backup de todos os arquivos importantes!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The " +"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to " +"back up your personal files." +msgstr "" +"Note que isto envolve a redução do tamanho da partição do Windows. A " +"partição deve ser \"limpa\", o que significa que o Windows deve ter fechado " +"corretamente na última vez que foi usado. Deve também ter sido " +"desfragmentado, embora isto não seja uma garantia de que todos os arquivos " +"da partição foram movidos para fora da área que está prestes a ser usada. É " +"altamente recomendável fazer backup de seus arquivos pessoais." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:84 +msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk." +msgstr "Apagar e utilizar o Disco Inteiro." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87 +msgid "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia." +msgstr "Esta opção utilizará a unidade completa para a Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:90 +msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!" +msgstr "" +"Atenção! Esta operação apagará todos os dados do disco rígido selecionado. " +"Tenha cuidado!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:93 +msgid "" +"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already " +"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use " +"this option." +msgstr "" +"Se você pretende utilizar parte do disco rígido para finalidade, ou você já " +"tem dados na unidade que você não deseja perder, então não utilize esta " +"opção." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:100 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "Personalizado" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102 +msgid "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" +"Isso lhe dará total controle sobre o local da instalação em seu(s) disco(s) " +"rígido(s)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:109 +msgid "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available " +"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested " +"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 " +"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning " +"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following " +"settings:" +msgstr "" +"Alguns discos mais recentes, estão usando setores lógicos de 4096 bytes, ao " +"invés do padrão anterior de 512 bytes. Em razão da indisponibilidade de " +"hardware, o programa de particionamento usado na instalação, ainda não foi " +"testado com discos deste tipo. Também alguns discos ssd agora utilizam um " +"erase block com mais de 1 MB. Se você possui um disco deste tipo, sugerimos " +"o pré-particionamento do disco, usando um programa de particionamento " +"alternativo, tipo o gparted, e use a seguinte configuração:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:117 +msgid "\"Align to\" \"MiB\"" +msgstr "\"Arredondar para\" \"MiB\"" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119 +msgid "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\"" +msgstr "\"Espaço livre Antes (MiB)\" \"2\"" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:121 +msgid "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes." +msgstr "" +"Certifique-se também que todas as partições tenham sido criadas com um " +"número par de megabytes." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:5 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "Seleção de Área de Trabalho" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11 +msgid "" +"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine " +"tune your choice." +msgstr "" +"Dependendo de suas seleções aqui, pode ser oferecido a você telas adicionais " +"para ajustar as suas escolhas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13 +msgid "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package " +"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the " +"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button" +msgstr "" +"Após a(s) etapa(s) de seleção(s), você vai ver uma apresentação de slides " +"durante a instalação dos pacotes. A apresentação de slides pode ser " +"desativada pressionando o botão <guilabel>Detalhes</guilabel>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or " +"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full " +"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if " +"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the " +"default software choices for these desktop environments. The " +"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, " +"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default." +msgstr "" +"Escolha se você prefere usar o ambiente de trabalho <application>KDE</" +"application> ou <application>Gnome</application>. Ambos vêm com um conjunto " +"completo de aplicações e ferramentas úteis. Marque <guilabel>Personalizar</" +"guilabel> se você quiser usar um ou ambos, ou se você quer algo diferente do " +"que as escolhas de software padrão para estes ambientes de desktop. O " +"desktop <application>LXDE</application> é mais leve que os dois anteriores, " +"ostentando colírio para os olhos e menos pacotes instalado por padrão." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:4 +msgid "Package Group Selection" +msgstr "Seleção de Grupo de Pacotes" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." +msgstr "" +"Os pacotes foram divididos em grupos, para fazer a escolha do que você " +"precisa no seu sistema ser muito mais fácil. Os grupos são bastante " +"autoexplicativo, no entanto, mais informações sobre o conteúdo de cada um " +"está disponível nas dicas de ferramentas, que se tornam visíveis quando o " +"mouse é passado sobre eles." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23 +msgid "Workstation." +msgstr "Estação de trabalho." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27 +msgid "Server." +msgstr "Servidor." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31 +msgid "Graphical Environment." +msgstr "Ambiente Gráfico." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or " +"remove packages." +msgstr "" +"Seleção de Pacotes Individuais: Você pode usar esta opção para adicionar ou " +"remover pacotes manualmente." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do " +"a minimal install." +msgstr "" +"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do " +"a minimal install." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:4 +msgid "Choose Individual Packages" +msgstr "Escolha Pacotes Individuais" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation." +msgstr "" +"Aqui você pode adicionar ou remover quaisquer pacotes extras para " +"personalizar a instalação." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20 +msgid "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</" +"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving " +"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same " +"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and " +"choosing to load it." +msgstr "" +"Depois de ter feito a sua escolha, você pode clicar no ícone do " +"<guibutton>disquete</guibutton>, na parte inferior da página, para salvar a " +"sua escolha de pacotes (salvar em um pendrive USB, também). Você pode então " +"usar este arquivo para instalar os mesmos pacotes em outro sistema, " +"pressionando o mesmo botão durante a instalação e escolhendo a carregá-lo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:19 +msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake" +msgstr "Personalização do particionamento de disco com DiskDrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"> </" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you " +"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The " +"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be " +"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable." +msgstr "" +"Se você deseja usar a criptografia em sua partição <literal>/</literal> " +"(raiz) você deve garantir que você tenha uma partição <literal>/boot</" +"literal> separada. A opção de criptografia para a partição <literal>/boot</" +"literal> NÃO deve ser feita, caso contrário, seu sistema não inicializará." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, " +"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what " +"is in them before you start." +msgstr "" +"Ajuste o layout de seu(s) disco(s) aqui. Você pode remover ou criar " +"partições, mudar o sistema de arquivos de uma partição ou alterar o seu " +"tamanho e até mesmo ver o que há neles antes de começar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:42 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an " +"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them." +msgstr "" +"Há uma aba para cada disco rígido ou outro dispositivo de armazenamento " +"detectado, como uma chave USB. Por exemplo sda, sdb e sdc, se existem três " +"deles." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected " +"storage device" +msgstr "" +"Pressione <guibutton>Limpar tudo</guibutton> para limpar todas as partições " +"no dispositivo de armazenamento selecionado." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it." +msgstr "" +"Para todas as outras ações: clicar na partição desejada primeiro. Em " +"seguida, visualizá-la, ou escolher um sistema de arquivos e um ponto de " +"montagem, redimensioná-la ou limpá-la." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:49 +msgid "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes." +msgstr "Continue até que você ajustar tudo como desejar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:51 +msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready." +msgstr "Click <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> quando estiver pronto." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:4 +msgid "Congratulations" +msgstr "Parabéns" + +#. Started by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! +#. marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text +#. same day, added "s" to "sytems" +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</" +"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot " +"your computer." +msgstr "" +"Você terminou de instalar e configurar a <application>Mageia</application> e " +"agora é seguro remover a mídia de instalação e reiniciar o seu computador." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:25 +msgid "" +"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating " +"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)." +msgstr "" +"Depois de reiniciar, você poderá escolher, na tela do gerenciador de " +"inicialização, entre os sistemas operacionais instalados no seu computador " +"(se você tiver mais de um)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." +msgstr "" +"Se você não ajustar as configurações no Gerenciador de Inicialização, sua " +"instalação Mageia será automaticamente selecionada e iniciada." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:31 +msgid "Enjoy!" +msgstr "Divirta-se!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to " +"Mageia" +msgstr "" +"Visite o site www.mageia.org se você tiver dúvidas ou quiser contribuir para " +"a Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:4 +msgid "Formatting" +msgstr "Formatação" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved." +msgstr "" +"Aqui você pode escolher qual(s) partição(s) que deseja formatar. Quaisquer " +"dados nas partições marcadas para formatação <emphasis>não</emphasis> serão " +"salvos." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:29 +msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted" +msgstr "" +"Normalmente, pelo menos as partições DrakX selecionados precisam ser " +"formatadas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to " +"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"Clique em <guibutton>Avançado</guibutton> para escolher as partições que " +"você deseja verificar os chamados <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> " +"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen. " +"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions." +msgstr "" +"Se você não tem certeza de ter feito a escolha certa, você pode clicar em " +"<guibutton>Anterior</guibutton>, novamente em <guibutton>Anterior</" +"guibutton> e, em seguida, <guibutton>Personalizar</guibutton> para voltar à " +"tela principal. Nessa tela você pode escolher para ver o que está em suas " +"partições." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> to continue." +msgstr "" +"Quando você estiver confiante em relação a seleção, clique em " +"<guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> para continuar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:3 +msgid "Updates" +msgstr "Atualizações" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 30 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename +#. marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some " +"packages will have been updated or improved." +msgstr "" +"Desde que esta versão da <application>Mageia</application> foi lançada, " +"alguns pacotes foram atualizados ou melhorados." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, " +"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" +msgstr "" +"Escolha <guilabel>sim</guilabel> se você deseja fazer o download e instalá-" +"los, selecione <guilabel>não</guilabel> se você não quer fazer isso agora, " +"ou se você não estiver conectado à Internet." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:28 +msgid "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue" +msgstr "Em seguida, pressione <guibutton>Próximo</guibutton> para continuar." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:3 +msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters" +msgstr "Resumo de diversos parâmetros" + +#. Started by marja on 2012 03 31 +#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! +#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots +#. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-) +#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages +#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and +#. the drakxid-miscellaneous section +#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph +#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph +#. 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. +#. 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:38 +msgid "" +"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want after pressing " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"DrakX fez escolhas inteligentes para a configuração do seu sistema, " +"dependendo das escolhas que você fez e sobre o hardware detectado pelo " +"DrakX. Você pode verificar as configurações aqui e alterá-las se você " +"quiser, depois de pressionar <guibutton>Configurar</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:45 +msgid "System parameters" +msgstr "Parâmetros do Sistema" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:50 +msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Fuso horário</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:52 +msgid "" +"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. " +"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/" +">" +msgstr "" +"DrakX seleciona um fuso horário para você, dependendo de seu idioma " +"preferido. Você pode mudá-lo se necessário. ver também <xref linkend=" +"\"configureTimezoneUTC\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:58 +msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>País / Região</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you " +"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Se você não está no país selecionado, é muito importante que você corrija a " +"configuração. Ver <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:67 +msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Gerenciador de Inicialização</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:69 +msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting." +msgstr "" +"DrakX fez boas opções para a configuração do gerenciador de inicialização." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo" +msgstr "" +"Não altere nada, a menos que você saiba como configurar o Grub e/ou o Lilo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:75 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>" +msgstr "" +"Para mais informações, consulte <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:80 +msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Gerenciamento de usuário</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:83 +msgid "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</" +"literal> directories." +msgstr "" +"Você pode adicionar usuários extras aqui. Cada um deles irão receber seus " +"próprios diretórios na pasta <literal>/home</literal>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:89 +msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Serviços</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:91 +msgid "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks." +msgstr "" +"Serviços do sistema referem-se aos pequenos programas que rodam no " +"background (daemons). Esta ferramenta permite habilitar ou desabilitar " +"certas tarefas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:95 +msgid "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly." +msgstr "" +"Você deve verificar cuidadosamente antes de alterar qualquer coisa aqui - um " +"erro pode impedir o seu computador de funcionar corretamente." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:99 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" +msgstr "Para mais informações, consulte <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:106 +msgid "Hardware parameters" +msgstr "Parâmetro de Hardware" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:111 +msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Teclado</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:113 +msgid "" +"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on " +"your location, language or type of keyboard." +msgstr "" +"Isto é onde você configura ou altera o layout do teclado, que vai depender " +"do seu Idioma, localização ou tipo de teclado." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:119 +msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:121 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." +msgstr "" +"Aqui você pode adicionar ou configurar outros dispositivos apontadores, " +"tablets, trackballs, etc" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:126 +msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Placa de Som</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:129 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the " +"options selected will work with your computer." +msgstr "" +"Esta seção permite-lhe fazer o ajuste fino da sua placa de som. Na maioria " +"dos casos, as opções selecionadas irão funcionar com seu computador." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:135 +msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Interface Gráfica</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:138 +msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays." +msgstr "" +"Esta secção permite-lhe configurar sua placa(s) de vídeo(s) e monitores." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:141 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>." +msgstr "" +"Para mais informação, consulte <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:147 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:155 +msgid "Network and Internet parameters" +msgstr "Parâmetros de rede e internet" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:161 +msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Rede</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:163 +msgid "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia " +"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the non-free media " +"repositories." +msgstr "" +"Você pode configurar sua rede aqui, mas para placas de rede com drivers não-" +"livres é melhor fazer isso depois de reiniciar, no <application>Centro de " +"Controle Mageia</application>, após ter habilitado as mídias dos " +"repositórios não-livres." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:170 +msgid "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch " +"that interface as well." +msgstr "" +"Quando você adiciona uma placa de rede, não se esqueça de configurar o seu " +"firewall para ver aquela interface também." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:177 +msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:179 +msgid "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." +msgstr "" +"Um Servidor Proxy atua como um intermediário entre o computador e a " +"Internet. Esta secção permite-lhe configurar o computador para utilizar um " +"serviço proxy." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:184 +msgid "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you " +"need to enter here" +msgstr "" +"Você pode precisar consultar o seu administrador de sistemas para obter os " +"parâmetros que você precisa inserir aqui." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:193 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "Segurança" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:198 +msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Nível de Segurança</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:201 +msgid "" +"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default " +"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use." +msgstr "" +"Aqui você define o Nível de Segurança para seu computador, na maioria dos " +"casos, a configuração padrão (Standard) é adequada para uso geral." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:205 +msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage." +msgstr "Verifique a opção que melhor se adapta ao seu uso." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:210 +msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:212 +msgid "" +"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the " +"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it." +msgstr "" +"Um firewall pretende ser uma barreira entre seus dados importantes e os " +"patifes lá fora, na internet, que possam comprometer ou roubar eles." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your " +"selections will depend on what you use your computer for." +msgstr "" +"Selecione os serviços que você deseja que tenha acesso ao seu sistema. Suas " +"opções vão depender de para que você usa seu computador." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:221 +msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky." +msgstr "" +"Ter em mente que permitir tudo (sem firewall) pode ser muito arriscado." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:12 +msgid "Configure your Timezone" +msgstr "Configure o seu fuso horário" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC." +"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC." +"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the " +"same time zone." +msgstr "" +"Escolha o seu fuso horário, escolha o seu país ou uma cidade próxima a você " +"no mesmo fuso horário." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:30 +msgid "" +"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to " +"GMT, also known as UTC." +msgstr "" +"Na próxima tela você pode optar por configurar seu relógio para a hora local " +"ou GMT, também conhecida como UTC." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:35 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." +msgstr "" +"Se você tiver mais de um sistema operacional em seu computador, certifique-" +"se que eles estão todos configurados para a hora local, ou todos para a UTC/" +"GMT." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" +msgstr "" +"Redimensionar partição <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" +"Você tem mais de uma partição do <application>Windows<superscript>®</" +"superscript></application>. Escolha qual deve ser reduzida para dar espaço " +"para a instalação <application>Mageia</application>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:11 +msgid "Setup SCSI" +msgstr "Detecção de disco rígido" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 +#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) +#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the +#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32 +msgid "" +"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers " +"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently " +"fail to recognise the drive." +msgstr "" +"O DrakX normalmente detecta discos rígidos corretamente. Pode, contudo, não " +"detectar alguns controladores de disco SCSI antigos e, portanto, deixar de " +"instalar os drivers necessários." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:36 +msgid "" +"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) " +"you have." +msgstr "" +"Se isso acontecer, você terá que manualmente dizer ao Drakx qual o " +"dispositivo(s) SCSI que você tem." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39 +msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly." +msgstr "" +"O DrakX deve então ser capaz de configurar o dispositivo(s) corretamente." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:4 +msgid "Select mouse" +msgstr "Selecione o mouse" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place +#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"selectMouse-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:23 +msgid "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." +msgstr "" +"Se você não está feliz com a forma como o mouse responde, você pode " +"selecionar um diferente aqui." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</" +"guilabel> is a good choice." +msgstr "" +"Geralmente, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - Qualquer <guilabel>mouse PS/2 " +"ou USB</guilabel> é uma boa escolha." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to " +"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons." +msgstr "" +"Selecione <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> " +"para configurar os botões que não funcionam em um mouse com seis ou mais " +"botões." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:3 +msgid "Bootloader main options" +msgstr "Principais Opções do Gerenciador de Inicialização" + +#. 2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml, from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence. +#. 2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:16 +msgid "" +"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by " +"the installer, you can change them here." +msgstr "" +"Se você preferir que as configurações do gerenciador de inicialização " +"(bootloader) sejam diferentes daquelas escolhidas automaticamente pelo " +"instalador, você pode alterá-las aqui." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case " +"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or " +"allow Mageia to create a new one." +msgstr "" +"Você pode já ter outro sistema operacional em sua máquina, neste caso, você " +"precisa decidir se deseja adicionar a Mageia no seu gerenciador de " +"inicialização existente, ou permitir que a Mageia crie um novo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:26 +msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)" +msgstr "O menu gráfico da Mageia é ótimo :)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32 +msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader" +msgstr "Usando o Gerenciador de Inicialização da Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36 +msgid "" +"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR " +"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other " +"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia " +"boot menu." +msgstr "" +"Por padrão a Mageia grava um novo gerenciador de inicialização (bootlader) " +"GRUB no MBR (Master Boot Record) do seu primeiro disco rígido. Se você já " +"tem outros sistemas operacionais instalados, a Mageia tentará adicioná-los " +"ao seu novo menu de inicialização." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB " +"legacy and Lilo." +msgstr "" +"A Mageia agora oferece também o GRUB2 como gerenciador de inicialização " +"opcional, em adição ao GRUB original e Lilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by " +"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is " +"used." +msgstr "" +"Os sistemas Linux que utilizam o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2, " +"atualmente não são suportados pelo GRUB (original) e não serão reconhecidos " +"se for utilizado o GRUB padrão." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:49 +msgid "" +"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at " +"the Summary page during installation." +msgstr "" +"A melhor solução neste caso é utilizar o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2 " +"que está disponível na página de resumo durante a instalação." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:56 +msgid "Using an existing bootloader" +msgstr "Usando um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember " +"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the " +"bootloader install location." +msgstr "" +"Se você decidir usar um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente, então você " +"precisa se lembrar de PARAR na página de resumo durante a instalação e " +"clicar no botão <guibutton>Configurar</guibutton> \"Gerenciador de " +"Inicialização\", o que permitirá que você mude o local de instalação do " +"Gerenciador de Inicialização." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. " +"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning " +"phase earlier, e.g. sda7." +msgstr "" +"Não selecione um dispositivo, por exemplo, \"sda\", ou você irá substituir " +"sua MBR existente. Você deve selecionar a partição que você escolheu durante " +"a fase de particionamento anterior, por exemplo: sda7." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71 +msgid "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device." +msgstr "Para ficar claro, sda é um dispositivo, sda7 é uma partição." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75 +msgid "" +"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where " +"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to " +"the installer screen." +msgstr "" +"Ir para tty2 com Ctrl+Alt+F2 e tecle <literal>df</literal> para verificar " +"onde a partição <literal>/</literal> (raiz) está. Ctrl+Alt+F7 leva você de " +"volta para a tela do instalador." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader " +"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve " +"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and " +"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in " +"question." +msgstr "" +"O procedimento exato para adicionar o seu sistema Mageia ao Gerenciador de " +"Inicialização existente, está além do escopo desta ajuda, no entanto, na " +"maioria dos casos irá envolver a execução adequado de um programa de " +"instalação do Gerenciador de Inicialização, que deve detectá-lo e adicioná-" +"lo automaticamente. Consulte a documentação para o sistema operacional em " +"questão." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:91 +msgid "Bootloader advanced option" +msgstr "Opções Avançadas do Gerenciador de Inicialização" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95 +msgid "" +"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition " +"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</" +"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space." +msgstr "" +"Se você tiver espaço em disco muito limitado para a partição <literal>/</" +"literal> (raiz) que contém <literal>/tmp</literal>, clique em " +"<guibutton>Avançado</guibutton> e marque a caixa <guilabel>Limpar /tmp a " +"cada inicialização</guilabel>. Isto ajuda a obter algum espaço livre " +"adicional." + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1 en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2 +msgid "en" +msgstr "pt_BR" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakX.xml:3 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "Instalando com DrakX" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note> +#: en/DrakX.xml:6 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "<note>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:7 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" +"Ninguém vai ver todas as telas do instalador mostradas neste manual. As " +"telas que você verá dependem de seu hardware e as escolhas que você faz " +"durante a instalação." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:10 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "</note>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" +"Os textos e imagens deste manual estão disponíveis sob a licença CC BY-SA " +"3.0 <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/\">http://" +"creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:16 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"Este manual foi produzido com a ajuda de <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco." +"com\">Calenco CMS</link> desenvolvido por <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc." +"biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:18 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" +"Ele foi escrito por voluntários em seu tempo livre. Entre em contato com a " +"<link ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Equipe de " +"Documentação</link>, se você deseja ajudar a melhorar este manual." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16 +msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" +msgstr "Escolha um Servidor X (Configure sua Placa de Vídeo)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:26 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." +msgstr "" +"DrakX tem um banco de dados muito completo de placas de vídeo e geralmente " +"identifica corretamente o seu dispositivo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" +msgstr "" +"Se o instalador não detectou corretamente sua placa de vídeo e você sabe " +"identificá-la, você pode selecioná-la a partir da árvore, escolhendo:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69 +msgid "vendor" +msgstr "fabricante" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:36 +msgid "then the name of your card" +msgstr "em seguida, o nome de sua placa" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:40 +msgid "and the type of card" +msgstr "e o tipo de placa" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44 +msgid "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"Xorg category" +msgstr "" +"Se você não consegue encontrar sua placa nas listas de fabricantes (porque " +"ainda não está no banco de dados ou é uma placa antiga), você pode encontrar " +"um driver adequado na categoria Xorg" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card " +"drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the " +"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities." +msgstr "" +"A listagem Xorg fornece mais de 40 drivers de placa de vídeos genéricos e de " +"código aberto. Se você ainda não conseguiu encontrar um driver para o sua " +"placa, há a opção de usar o driver vesa que fornece os recursos básicos." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the Commandline Interface." +msgstr "" +"Esteja ciente de que se você selecionar um driver incompatível você só pode " +"ter acesso à interface de linha de comando." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55 +msgid "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some " +"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites" +msgstr "" +"Alguns fabricantes de placas de vídeo oferecem drivers proprietários para " +"Linux, que só podem estar disponíveis nos repositórios Non-free ou Tainted " +"e, em alguns casos, apenas nos sites dos fabricantes de placas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:59 +msgid "" +"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to " +"access them, you should do this after your first reboot." +msgstr "" +"Os respositórios Non-free e Tainted precisam ser explicitamente habilitados " +"para acessá-los, você deve fazer isso após o primeiro reinício." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18 +msgid "Choosing your Monitor" +msgstr "Escolhendo seu Monitor" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:21 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." +msgstr "" +"DrakX tem um banco de dados bastante extenso de monitores e geralmente " +"identificará corretamente o seu." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage " +"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing " +"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor " +"documentation" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Selecionando um monitor com características diferentes pode " +"danificar seu equipamento de vídeo. Por favor não tente algo sem " +"conhecimento do que você está fazendo. </emphasis>Se você tiver dúvidas, " +"consulte a documentação de seu monitor." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42 +msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Personalizado</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." +msgstr "" +"Esta opção permite você definir dois parâmetros importantes, a taxa de " +"atualização vertical e da taxa de sicronização horizontal. A atualização " +"vertical determina a frequência que a tela será atualizada e a sicronização " +"horizontal é a taxa de linhas que serão exibidas." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:49 +msgid "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" +"É <emphasis>MUITO IMPORTANTE</emphasis> que você não especifique um tipo de " +"monitor com uma gama de sincronização que está além das capacidades do seu " +"equipamento: você pode danificá-lo. Em caso de dúvidas, escolha uma " +"configuração conservadora e consulte a documentação de seu monitor." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:55 +msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:58 +msgid "" +"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the " +"monitor database." +msgstr "" +"É a opção padrão e tenta determinar o tipo de monitor no banco de dados." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63 +msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Fabricante</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:" +msgstr "" +"Se o instalador não detectou corretamente o seu monitor e você sabe " +"identificá-lo, você pode selecioná-lo a partir da árvore, escolhendo:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:73 +msgid "the monitor manufacturers name" +msgstr "o nome do fabricante do monitor" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:77 +msgid "the monitor description" +msgstr "a descrição do monitor" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:82 +msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84 +msgid "" +"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as " +"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is " +"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver " +"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it " +"may be wise to be conservative in your selections." +msgstr "" +"A seleção deste grupo apresenta cerca de 30 configurações de tela, tal como " +"1024x768 @ 60Hz, incluindo as telas planas como as usadas em laptops. Esta é " +"frequentemente uma boa opção de seleção de grupo de monitor, se você usa o " +"driver da placa Vesa, quando seu equipamento de vídeo não é identificado " +"automaticamente. Mais uma vez, pode ser ser sábio ser cauteloso em suas " +"seleções." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4 +msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration" +msgstr "Configuração da placa de vídeo e monitor" + +#. Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18 +msgid "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are " +"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window " +"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for " +"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or " +"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</" +"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can " +"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you " +"think the choice is incorrect." +msgstr "" +"Não importa qual ambiente gráfico (também conhecido como ambiente de " +"desktop) que você escolheu para esta instalação da <application>Mageia</" +"application>, eles são todos baseados em um sistema de interface gráfica de " +"usuário chamada <acronym>X Window System</acronym>, ou simplesmente " +"<acronym>X</acronym>. Então, para <acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</" +"acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> ou qualquer outro ambiente gráfico " +"funcionar bem, as configurações de <acronym>X</acronym> a seguir precisam " +"ser corretas. Escolha as configurações corretas, se você pode ver que o " +"<application>DrakX</application> não fazer uma escolha, ou se você acha que " +"a escolha é incorreta." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card " +"from the list if needed." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Placa de Vídeo</guibutton></emphasis>: Escolha a sua " +"placa da lista, se necessário.." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:37 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose " +"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor " +"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. " +"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the " +"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: Você pode escolher " +"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> quando aplicável, ou escolher o seu monitor " +"a partir da lista de <guilabel>Fornecedores</guilabel> ou " +"<guilabel>Genéricos</guilabel>. Escolha <guilabel>Personalizar</guilabel> se " +"você preferir definir manualmente as taxas de atualização horizontal e " +"vertical do seu monitor." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:45 +msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor" +msgstr "Taxas de atualização incorreta pode danificar o seu monitor" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:51 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired " +"resolution and color depth of your monitor here." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolução</guibutton></emphasis>: Defina aqui a " +"resolução e profundidade de cor desejada de seu monitor." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not " +"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your " +"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your " +"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. " +"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be " +"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure " +"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Teste</guibutton></emphasis>: O botão de teste nem " +"sempre aparece durante a instalação. Se o botão está lá, você pode controlar " +"suas configurações pressionando-a. Se você ver uma indagação perguntando se " +"suas configurações estão corretas, você pode responder \"sim\", e as " +"configurações serão mantidas. Se você não vê nada, você vai voltar para a " +"tela de configuração e ser capaz de reconfigurar tudo até o teste ficar bom. " +"<emphasis>Certifique-se de que suas configurações estejam da forma mais " +"segura, caso o botão de teste não esteja disponível</emphasis>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to " +"enable or disable various options." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Opções</guibutton></emphasis>: Aqui você pode optar por " +"ativar ou desativar várias opções." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:5 +msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" +msgstr "Adicionando ou Modificando uma Entrada do Menu de Inicialização" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the " +"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen " +"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it." +msgstr "" +"Você pode adicionar uma entrada ou modificar a que você selecionar primeiro, " +"pressionando o botão correspondente na janela de <emphasis>Configuração do " +"Menu de Inicialização</emphasis> e editando a janela que abrir em cima dela." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an " +"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one." +msgstr "" +"Algumas coisas que podem ser feitas sem qualquer risco são, mudar o rótulo " +"de uma entrada e selecionar a caixa de uma entrada para torná-la padrão." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely." +msgstr "" +"Você pode adicionar o número da versão correta de uma entrada, ou renomeá-la " +"completamente." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a " +"choice while booting up." +msgstr "" +"A entrada padrão vai inicializar o sistema se você não fizer uma escolha " +"durante a inicialização." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:29 +msgid "" +"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't " +"just try something without knowing what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"Editar outras coisas pode fazer com que o sistema não inicie. Por favor, não " +"tente algo sem saber o que está fazendo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:3 +msgid "Minimal Install" +msgstr "Instalação Mínima" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:9 +msgid "" +"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the " +"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></" +"xref>." +msgstr "" +"Você pode escolher uma instalação mínima desmarcando todas as seleções na " +"tela Seleção do Grupo de Pacotes, ver <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups" +"\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised " +"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package " +"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>." +msgstr "" +"A instalação mínima é destinado para aqueles com usos específicos em mente " +"para sua <application>Mageia</application>, como um servidor ou estação de " +"trabalho especializado. Você provavelmente irá utilizar esta opção, " +"combinada com a seleção manual de pacotes, ver <xref linkend=" +"\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer " +"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X." +msgstr "" +"Se você escolher esta classe de instalação, em seguida, a próxima tela irá " +"oferecer-lhe alguns pacotes extras úteis para instalar, tais como a " +"documentação e o X." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:12 +msgid "Security Level" +msgstr "Nível de Segurança" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:24 +msgid "You can adjust your security level here." +msgstr "Você pode ajustar o seu nível de segurança aqui." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose." +msgstr "" +"Deixe as configurações padrão como estão, se você não sabe o que escolher." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:30 +msgid "" +"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings " +"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center." +msgstr "" +"Após a instalação, sempre será possível ajustar as configurações de " +"segurança na aba <guilabel>Segurança</guilabel> do Centro de Controle Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:13 +msgid "Select your Country / Region" +msgstr "Selecione seu país / região" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network." +msgstr "" +"Selecione seu país ou região. Isso é importante para todos os tipos de " +"configurações, como a moeda e domínio regulador do wireless. Definir o país " +"errado pode levar a não ser capaz de usar uma rede sem fio." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:32 +msgid "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</" +"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there." +msgstr "" +"Se o seu país não está na lista, clique no botão <guilabel>Outros Países</" +"guilabel> e escolha seu país / região lá." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, " +"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the " +"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real " +"choice." +msgstr "" +"Se o seu país está apenas na lista <guilabel>Outros Países</guilabel>, " +"depois de clicar <guibutton>OK</guibutton> pode parecer um país de uma " +"primeira lista foi escolhida. Por favor, ignore isso, o DrakX seguirá sua " +"escolha real." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:46 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "Método de entrada" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:49 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-" +"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method " +"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, " +"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you " +"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." +msgstr "" +"Na tela <guilabel>Outros Países</guilabel> você também pode selecionar um " +"método de entrada (na parte inferior da lista). Métodos de entrada permitem " +"a entrada de caracteres multilíngues (chinês, japonês, coreano, etc). IBus é " +"o método de entrada padrão nos DVDs e nos live-CDs da Mageia para a África/" +"Índia e Ásia/no-Índia. Para idiomas asiáticos e africanos, o IBus será " +"definido como método de entrada padrão para que os usuários não precisem " +"configurá-lo manualmente. Outros métodos de entrada (SCIM, gcin, HIME, etc) " +"também oferecem funções semelhantes e podem ser instalados se você adicionou " +"as mídias HTTP/FTP antes da seleção do pacote." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -> " +"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root." +msgstr "" +"Se você perdeu a configuração do método de entrada durante a instalação, " +"você pode acessá-lo depois de inicializar o sistema instalado, acessando " +"\"Configure seu Computador\" -> \"Sistema\", ou executando localedrake " +"(gerenciador de localização/idiomas) como root." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/media_selection.xml:3 +msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)" +msgstr "Seleção de Mídia (Nonfree)" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media) +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong) +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/media_selection.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." +msgstr "" +"Aqui você tem uma lista dos repositórios disponíveis. Nem todos os " +"repositórios estarão disponíveis, dependendo do tipo de mídia que você " +"estiver usando para a instalação. A seleção do repositório determinará quais " +"pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção durante os próximos passos." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:25 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." +msgstr "" +"O repositório <emphasis>Core</emphasis> não pode ser desabilitado uma vez " +"que ele contém a base da distribuição." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:30 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." +msgstr "" +"O repositório <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> inclui pacotes que são " +"gratuitos, ou seja, a Mageia pode redistribuí-los, mas eles contêm código-" +"fonte fechado (daí o nome - Nonfree). Por exemplo, este repositório inclui " +"drivers proprietários para placas de vídeo nVidia e ATI, firmware para " +"várias placas WiFi, etc." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:38 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD, etc." +msgstr "" +"O repositório <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> inclui pacotes distribuídos sob " +"licença livre. O principal critério para colocar pacotes neste repositório é " +"que eles podem infringir patentes e leis de direitos autorais em alguns " +"países, por exemplo, codecs multimídia necessários para reproduzir vários " +"arquivos de áudio/video; pacotes necessários para reproduzir DVD de vídeo " +"comercial, etc." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:10 +msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)" +msgstr "Seleção de Mídia (Configurar a Instalação de Mídias Suplementares )" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The " +"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection " +"during the next steps." +msgstr "" +"Esta tela lista os repositórios reconhecidos automaticamente. Você pode " +"adicionar outras fontes de pacotes, como um CD-ROM ou uma fonte remota. A " +"fonte selecionada determina quais pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção " +"durante os próximos passos." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29 +msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" +msgstr "Para instalação via rede, siga os seguintes passos:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:33 +msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up." +msgstr "Escolha e ativação da rede, caso não esteja disponível." + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With " +"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS " +"installation." +msgstr "" +"selecione um mirror ou especifique uma URL (a primeira opção). Selecionando " +"um mirror, você tem acesso a todos os repositórios gerenciados pela Mageia, " +"como os repositórios non-freee, tainted e updates. Informando uma URL, você " +"pode selecionar um repositório específico ou seu próprio compartilhamento " +"NFS de instalação." + +#~ msgid "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Escolha de disco rígido para apagar para <application>Mageia</application>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install " +#~ "<application>Mageia</application>." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Selecione o disco rígido que deve ser formatado para instalar a " +#~ "<application>Mageia</application>." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk " +#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Certifique-se de selecionar o disco rígido correto. Todos os dados no " +#~ "disco selecionado serão perdidos. Esta etapa não poderá ser desfeita." + +#~ msgid "Bootloader main options (old page)" +#~ msgstr "Principais Opções do Gerenciador de Inicialização (velha página)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because " +#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main " +#~ "options''' screen in installer links to." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because " +#~ "that is the page the help button for this screen links to." + +#~ msgid "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Configure o X, configuração da placa de vídeo e monitor (velha página)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> " +#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card " +#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> " +#~ "because the help button for this screen links to that file." + +#~ msgid "Bootloader expert use" +#~ msgstr "Uso especializado do Gerenciador de Inicialização" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/" +#~ "> first." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se você não tiver feito isso ainda, por favor leia <xref linkend=" +#~ "\"setupBootloader\"/> primeiro." + +#~ msgid "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually" +#~ msgstr "Adicionando manualmente um sistema baseado no GRUB2" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Um sistema baseado no GRUB2 pode ser adicionados ao menu de inicialização " +#~ "da Mageia como segue:" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version " +#~ "run the following command in a terminal:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Inicializar o sistema em questão. A fim de determinar a versão GRUB2, " +#~ "executar o seguinte comando em um terminal:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>" + +#~ msgid "or if that fails try:" +#~ msgstr "ou se isso falhar, tentar:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom " +#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 " +#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during " +#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se este retorna \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possivelmente com um sufixo " +#~ "personalizado), então ele está usando o GRUB (também chamado GRUB legacy) " +#~ "e não o GRUB2 e o seu sistema deve ser corretamente identificado pela " +#~ "Mageia durante a instalação e acrescentado automaticamente no menu." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se este comando retornar (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 ou 2.xx, então você está " +#~ "usando GRUB2." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root " +#~ "partition:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Anote a versão e digite este comando para identificar a partição root:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" + +#~ msgid "This will output something like :" +#~ msgstr "A saída será algo como:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>" + +#~ msgid "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it." +#~ msgstr "sdb11 é a partição raiz - anote isto." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the " +#~ "following command:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Agora, verifique se a pasta /boot está na mesma partição, digitando o " +#~ "seguinte comando:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a " +#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu." +#~ "lst below." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se a partição /boot é diferente da partição raiz, então, anote e use a " +#~ "partição /boot na linha \"root\" ao editar o menu.lst abaixo." + +#~ msgid "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia." +#~ msgstr "Agora você pode desligar o sistema e instalar a Mageia" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the " +#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Em seu novo sistema Mageia em execução, abra um terminal e, como root, " +#~ "edite o arquivo /boot/grub/menu.lst como segue:" + +#~ msgid "To become root use:" +#~ msgstr "Para tornar-se root use:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>su -</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>su -</literal>" + +#~ msgid "(enter root password)" +#~ msgstr "(enter root password)" + +#~ msgid "To open the file in an editor use:" +#~ msgstr "Para abrir o arquivo em um editor, use:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>" + +#~ msgid "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "(substituir \"kwrite\" por \"gedit\" se você estiver usando o Gnome)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the " +#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on " +#~ "its position in the file:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Adicione a seguinte entrada (por exemplo, Ubuntu) para o seu sistema , " +#~ "possivelmente como a segunda estrofe. A posição que o item aparece no " +#~ "menu dependerá da sua posição no arquivo:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" " +#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy " +#~ "GRUB count from zero." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Na segunda linha, \"hd1\" significa o segundo disco rígido, o \"10\" " +#~ "indica a 11ª partição. Unidades e partições no GRUB legacy da Mageia " +#~ "conta-se a partir do zero." + +#~ msgid "Therefore:" +#~ msgstr "Portanto:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :" +#~ msgstr "Se a versão GRUB2 é 2.xx, então mudar a última linha para:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub" +#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se você precisou usar \"grub2-install\" antes, então, mudar <literal>" +#~ "\"grub\"</literal> para <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> na última linha." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</" +#~ "literal> from the last line." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se /boot estava em uma partição separada, então, remova <literal>\"/boot" +#~ "\"</literal> da última linha." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in " +#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Salve o arquivo e reinicie. Agora você deve ver a entrada do seu \"Ubuntu" +#~ "\" no menu e ser capaz de iniciar a partir dele." + +#~ msgid "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader" +#~ msgstr "Usando um gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2 existente" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader " +#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Se você não leu ainda a parte geral sobre como utilizar um gerenciador de " +#~ "inicialização existente, então, faça isso agora. Consulte <xref linkend=" +#~ "\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some " +#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding " +#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details " +#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the " +#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Existe um bug conhecido no OS-prober (usado durante a instalação do " +#~ "GRUB2, em algumas versões do Debian/Ubuntu), que cria incorretamente grub." +#~ "cfg ao adicionar o sistema Mageia (ou Mandriva). Isto é simples de " +#~ "resolver e os detalhes da solução podem ser encontrados no Fórum Mageia " +#~ "(en). Pesquise por \"prober\", o tema é \"grub problem\", o post #9 tem " +#~ "as informações." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel " +#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub." +#~ "d/40_custom</literal>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Para tornar a correção permanente, de modo que sobreviva a uma " +#~ "atualização de kernel do Ubuntu, a entrada Mageia deve ser adicionada à " +#~ "<literal>/etc/grub.d/40_custom</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. " +#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the " +#~ "preferred solution." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Notícia recente: O bug foi corrigido no os-prober-1.53, lançado em 08 de " +#~ "maio de 2012. Então, agora a atualização para a nova versão da sua " +#~ "instalação GRUB2 é a melhor solução." diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5dc2fdee --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pt_BR" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Instalando com DrakX + + + + Ninguém vai ver todas as telas do instalador mostradas neste manual. As +telas que você verá dependem de seu hardware e as escolhas que você faz +durante a instalação. + + + Os textos e imagens deste manual estão disponíveis sob a licença CC BY-SA +3.0 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + Este manual foi produzido com a ajuda de Calenco CMS desenvolvido por NeoDoc. + + Ele foi escrito por voluntários em seu tempo livre. Entre em contato com a +Equipe de +Documentação, se você deseja ajudar a melhorar este manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13081316 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Licenças e Notas de Lançamento + + + + + + +
+ + Acordo de Licença + + + Antes de instalar a Mageia, por favor, leia os +termos e condições da licença cuidadosamente. + + Estes termos e condições aplicam-se à distribuição +Mageia toda e deve ser aceita antes para que você +possa continuar. + + Para aceitar, basta selecionar Aceitar e, em seguida, +clique em Avançar. + + Se você decidir não aceitar essas condições, então agradecemos a +procura. Clicando Sair irá reiniciar seu computador. + + + +
+ +
+ + + Notas de Lançamento + + + + + Para ver o que há de novo nesta versão da Mageia, +clique no botão Notas de Lançamento. +
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58831604 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +
+ + + Gerenciador de Usuário e Superusuário + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + Definir senha do administrador (root): + + + É aconselhável para todas as instalações Mageia +definir um superusuário e a senha do administrador, normalmente chamado a +senha de root no Linux. A medida que você digite uma +senha na caixa de cima, a cor de seu escudo vai mudar de vermelho para +amarelo para verde, dependendo da força da senha. Um escudo verde mostra que +você está usando uma senha forte. Você precisa repetir a mesma senha na +caixa logo abaixo da primeira caixa de senha, verificando se você não tiver +digitado corretamente a primeira senha, comparando-as. + + + Todas as senhas são "case sensitive" (diferenciam entre letras maiúsculas e +minusculas), o melhor é usar uma mistura de letras (maiúsculas e +minúsculas), números e outros caracteres em uma senha. + +
+ +
+ + Digite um usuário + + + Adicionar um usuário aqui. Um usuário tem menos direitos do que o +superusuário (root), mas o suficiente para navegar na internet, usar +aplicativos de escritório ou jogar jogos e qualquer outra coisa que o +usuário médio faz com o seu computador. + + + + Ícone: se você clicar neste botão irá mudar o ícone +de usuários. + + + + Nome real: Insira o nome de usuários reais na caixa de +texto. + + + + nome de Login: Aqui você digita o nome de login do +usuário ou deixe DrakX usar uma versão do nome do usuário real. O nome de +login é "case sensitive". + + + + Senha: Nesta caixa de texto você deve digitar a senha +do usuário. Existe um escudo no final da caixa de texto que indica a força +da senha. (Veja também ) + + + + Senha (novamente): Redigite a senha do usuário na caixa +de texto e Drakx irá verificar se você digitou a mesma senha em cada uma das +caixas de texto de senha do usuário. + + + + + Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but +write protected) home directory. + + However, while using your new install, any user you add in MCC - +System - Manage users on system will have a home directory that +is both read and write protected. + + If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised +to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot. + + If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all +extra needed users in the Configuration - Summary step +during the install. Choose User management. + + The access permissions can also be changed after the install. + + +
+ +
+ + Gerenciamento Avançado de Usuários + + + Se o botão avançado é clicado, é oferecido a você uma +tela que permite que você edite as configurações do usuário que você está +adicionando. Além disso, você pode ativar ou desativar uma conta de +convidado. + + + Qualquer coisa que um convidado com uma conta de convidado padrão +rbash salva em seu diretório /home +será apagada quando ele sair. O usuário convidado deve salvar seus arquivos +importantes em um pendrive USB. + + + + + Ativar conta de convidado: Aqui você pode ativar ou +desativar uma conta de convidado. A conta de convidado permite que um +convidado acessar e usar o PC, mas ele tem acesso mais restrito do que os +usuários normais. + + + + Shell: Esta lista suspensa permite que você altere o +shell usado pelo usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior, as +opções são Bash, Dash e Sh. + + + + ID de usuário: Aqui você pode definir o ID de usuário +para o usuário que você está adicionando na tela anterior. Este é um +número. Deixe em branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo. + + + + ID de Grupo: Isso permite que você defina o ID do +grupo. Também um número, normalmente o mesmo que para o utilizador. Deixe em +branco se você não sabe o que está fazendo. + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..860f55b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + +
+ + Seleção de Mídia (Configurar a Instalação de Mídias Suplementares ) + + + + + + + + + + + + + Esta tela lista os repositórios reconhecidos automaticamente. Você pode +adicionar outras fontes de pacotes, como um CD-ROM ou uma fonte remota. A +fonte selecionada determina quais pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção +durante os próximos passos. + + Para instalação via rede, siga os seguintes passos: + + + + Escolha e ativação da rede, caso não esteja disponível. + + + + selecione um mirror ou especifique uma URL (a primeira opção). Selecionando +um mirror, você tem acesso a todos os repositórios gerenciados pela Mageia, +como os repositórios non-freee, tainted e updates. Informando uma URL, você +pode selecionar um repositório específico ou seu próprio compartilhamento +NFS de instalação. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0657359a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + +
+ + + Escolha os pontos de montagem + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Aqui você vê as partições Linux que foram encontrados em seu computador. Se +você não concorda com as sugestões do DrakX, você +pode alterar os pontos de montagem. + + + Se você mudar alguma coisa, certifique-se de ainda ter uma partição +/ (root). + + + + + Cada partição é mostrada como segue: "Dispositivo" ("Capacidade", "Ponto de +montagem", "Tipo"). + + + + "Dispositivo", é composto de: "disco rígido", ["número do disco rígido" +(letra)], "número da partição" (por exemplo, "sda5"). + + + + + Se você tiver várias partições, você pode escolher vários pontos de montagem +diferentes a partir de um menu rolante (drop-down), como +/, /home e +/var. Você mesmo pode fazer seus próprios pontos de +montagem, por exemplo /video para uma partição onde você +deseja armazenar seus filmes, ou /cauldron-home para a +partição /home de uma instalação caldeirão (versão da +Mageia em desenvolvimento). + + + + Para partições que você não precisa ter acesso, você pode deixar o campo do +ponto de montagem em branco. + + + + + Escolha a opção Anterior se você não tiver certeza do +que escolher, e em seguida, assinale o Personalização do +particionamento de disco. Na tela seguinte você pode clicar em +uma partição para ver seu tipo e tamanho. + + + Se você tiver certeza que os pontos de montagem estão corretos, clique em +Próximo e escolha se você só quiser formatar a(s) +partição(s) que o DrakX sugere, ou mais. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26249bc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +
+ + + + + Seleção de Área de Trabalho + + + + + + Dependendo de suas seleções aqui, pode ser oferecido a você telas adicionais +para ajustar as suas escolhas. + + Após a(s) etapa(s) de seleção(s), você vai ver uma apresentação de slides +durante a instalação dos pacotes. A apresentação de slides pode ser +desativada pressionando o botão Detalhes. + + + + + + + Escolha se você prefere usar o ambiente de trabalho +KDE ou Gnome. Ambos +vêm com um conjunto completo de aplicações e ferramentas úteis. Marque +Personalizar se você quiser usar um ou ambos, ou se +você quer algo diferente do que as escolhas de software padrão para estes +ambientes de desktop. O desktop LXDE é mais leve +que os dois anteriores, ostentando colírio para os olhos e menos pacotes +instalado por padrão. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..de0eed6f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +
+ + + Seleção de Grupo de Pacotes + + + + + + + + + Os pacotes foram divididos em grupos, para fazer a escolha do que você +precisa no seu sistema ser muito mais fácil. Os grupos são bastante +autoexplicativo, no entanto, mais informações sobre o conteúdo de cada um +está disponível nas dicas de ferramentas, que se tornam visíveis quando o +mouse é passado sobre eles. + + + + Estação de trabalho. + + + + Servidor. + + + + Ambiente Gráfico. + + + + Seleção de Pacotes Individuais: Você pode usar esta opção para adicionar ou +remover pacotes manualmente. + + + Read for instructions on how to do a +minimal install. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e77d0bf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +
+ + + Escolha Pacotes Individuais + + + + + + + + + Aqui você pode adicionar ou remover quaisquer pacotes extras para +personalizar a instalação. + + Depois de ter feito a sua escolha, você pode clicar no ícone do +disquete, na parte inferior da página, para salvar a +sua escolha de pacotes (salvar em um pendrive USB, também). Você pode então +usar este arquivo para instalar os mesmos pacotes em outro sistema, +pressionando o mesmo botão durante a instalação e escolhendo a carregá-lo. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8a1691a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + +
+ + + + Configurar os seus serviços + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Aqui você pode definir quais serviços devem (ou não) começar quando você +inicializar seu sistema. + + Há quatro grupos, clique no triângulo diante de um grupo para expandi-lo e +ver todos os serviços nele. + + A configuração escolhida pelo DrakX são geralmente boas. + + Se você selecionar um serviço, algumas informações sobre ele são mostradas +na caixa de informações abaixo. + + Apenas mude as coisas quando você sabe muito bem o que você está fazendo. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1fe283b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + +
+ + + + Configure o seu fuso horário + + + + + + + + + + + + + Escolha o seu fuso horário, escolha o seu país ou uma cidade próxima a você +no mesmo fuso horário. + + Na próxima tela você pode optar por configurar seu relógio para a hora local +ou GMT, também conhecida como UTC. + + + Se você tiver mais de um sistema operacional em seu computador, +certifique-se que eles estão todos configurados para a hora local, ou todos +para a UTC/GMT. + +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c9ed92b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Escolha um Servidor X (Configure sua Placa de Vídeo) + + + + + + DrakX tem um banco de dados muito completo de placas de vídeo e geralmente +identifica corretamente o seu dispositivo. + + Se o instalador não detectou corretamente sua placa de vídeo e você sabe +identificá-la, você pode selecioná-la a partir da árvore, escolhendo: + + + + fabricante + + + + em seguida, o nome de sua placa + + + + e o tipo de placa + + + + Se você não consegue encontrar sua placa nas listas de fabricantes (porque +ainda não está no banco de dados ou é uma placa antiga), você pode encontrar +um driver adequado na categoria Xorg + + A listagem Xorg fornece mais de 40 drivers de placa de vídeos genéricos e de +código aberto. Se você ainda não conseguiu encontrar um driver para o sua +placa, há a opção de usar o driver vesa que fornece os recursos básicos. + + Esteja ciente de que se você selecionar um driver incompatível você só pode +ter acesso à interface de linha de comando. + + + Alguns fabricantes de placas de vídeo oferecem drivers proprietários para +Linux, que só podem estar disponíveis nos repositórios Non-free ou Tainted +e, em alguns casos, apenas nos sites dos fabricantes de placas. + + Os respositórios Non-free e Tainted precisam ser explicitamente habilitados +para acessá-los, você deve fazer isso após o primeiro reinício. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..51984553 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +
+ + + Configuração da placa de vídeo e monitor + + + + + + + + + + Não importa qual ambiente gráfico (também conhecido como ambiente de +desktop) que você escolheu para esta instalação da +Mageia, eles são todos baseados em um sistema de +interface gráfica de usuário chamada X Window System, ou +simplesmente X. Então, para KDE, +Gnome, LXDE ou qualquer outro ambiente +gráfico funcionar bem, as configurações de X a seguir +precisam ser corretas. Escolha as configurações corretas, se você pode ver +que o DrakX não fazer uma escolha, ou se você +acha que a escolha é incorreta. + + + + Placa de Vídeo: Escolha a sua +placa da lista, se necessário.. + + + + Monitor: Você pode escolher +Plug'n Play quando aplicável, ou escolher o seu monitor +a partir da lista de Fornecedores ou +Genéricos. Escolha Personalizar se +você preferir definir manualmente as taxas de atualização horizontal e +vertical do seu monitor. + + + Taxas de atualização incorreta pode danificar o seu monitor + + + + + Resolução: Defina aqui a +resolução e profundidade de cor desejada de seu monitor. + + + + Teste: O botão de teste nem +sempre aparece durante a instalação. Se o botão está lá, você pode controlar +suas configurações pressionando-a. Se você ver uma indagação perguntando se +suas configurações estão corretas, você pode responder "sim", e as +configurações serão mantidas. Se você não vê nada, você vai voltar para a +tela de configuração e ser capaz de reconfigurar tudo até o teste ficar +bom. Certifique-se de que suas configurações estejam da forma mais +segura, caso o botão de teste não esteja disponível. + + + + Opções: Aqui você pode optar por +ativar ou desativar várias opções. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46c02add --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Escolhendo seu Monitor + + + DrakX tem um banco de dados bastante extenso de monitores e geralmente +identificará corretamente o seu. + + + Selecionando um monitor com características diferentes pode +danificar seu equipamento de vídeo. Por favor não tente algo sem +conhecimento do que você está fazendo. Se você tiver dúvidas, +consulte a documentação de seu monitor. + + + + + + Personalizado + + Esta opção permite você definir dois parâmetros importantes, a taxa de +atualização vertical e da taxa de sicronização horizontal. A atualização +vertical determina a frequência que a tela será atualizada e a sicronização +horizontal é a taxa de linhas que serão exibidas. + + É MUITO IMPORTANTE que você não especifique um tipo de +monitor com uma gama de sincronização que está além das capacidades do seu +equipamento: você pode danificá-lo. Em caso de dúvidas, escolha uma +configuração conservadora e consulte a documentação de seu monitor. + + Plug 'n Play + + É a opção padrão e tenta determinar o tipo de monitor no banco de dados. + + Fabricante + + Se o instalador não detectou corretamente o seu monitor e você sabe +identificá-lo, você pode selecioná-lo a partir da árvore, escolhendo: + + fabricante + + + + o nome do fabricante do monitor + + + + a descrição do monitor + + + + Generic + + A seleção deste grupo apresenta cerca de 30 configurações de tela, tal como +1024x768 @ 60Hz, incluindo as telas planas como as usadas em laptops. Esta é +frequentemente uma boa opção de seleção de grupo de monitor, se você usa o +driver da placa Vesa, quando seu equipamento de vídeo não é identificado +automaticamente. Mais uma vez, pode ser ser sábio ser cauteloso em suas +seleções. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c73374c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Personalização do particionamento de disco com DiskDrake + + + + + + + + + + + Se você deseja usar a criptografia em sua partição / +(raiz) você deve garantir que você tenha uma partição +/boot separada. A opção de criptografia para a partição +/boot NÃO deve ser feita, caso contrário, seu sistema não +inicializará. + + + Ajuste o layout de seu(s) disco(s) aqui. Você pode remover ou criar +partições, mudar o sistema de arquivos de uma partição ou alterar o seu +tamanho e até mesmo ver o que há neles antes de começar. + + + Há uma aba para cada disco rígido ou outro dispositivo de armazenamento +detectado, como uma chave USB. Por exemplo sda, sdb e sdc, se existem três +deles. + + + Pressione Limpar tudo para limpar todas as partições +no dispositivo de armazenamento selecionado. + + Para todas as outras ações: clicar na partição desejada primeiro. Em +seguida, visualizá-la, ou escolher um sistema de arquivos e um ponto de +montagem, redimensioná-la ou limpá-la. + + Continue até que você ajustar tudo como desejar. + + Click Ok quando estiver pronto.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09d72e42 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Particionamento + + + Nesta tela você pode ver o conteúdo do seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s) e ver as +soluções que o assistente de particionamento DrakX encontrou para onde +instalar Mageia. + + As opções disponíveis na lista abaixo irão variar, dependendo do layout e do +conteúdo específicos do(s) seu(s) disco(s) rígido(s). + + + + + + + + Utilizar as partições existentes + + Se esta opção estiver disponível, então partições existentes compatíveis com +o Linux foram encontrados e podem ser utilizadas para a instalação. + + + + Usar o espaço livre + + Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em seu disco rígido, então esta opção irá +usá-lo para a sua nova instalação da Mageia. + + + + Use o espaço livre na partição do Windows + + Se você tiver espaço não utilizado em uma partição existente do Windows, o +instalador pode oferecer para usá-lo. + + Esta pode ser uma maneira útil de obter espaço para a sua nova instalação da +Mageia, mas é uma operação arriscada, por isso você deve ter a certeza de +ter um backup de todos os arquivos importantes! + + Note que isto envolve a redução do tamanho da partição do Windows. A +partição deve ser "limpa", o que significa que o Windows deve ter fechado +corretamente na última vez que foi usado. Deve também ter sido +desfragmentado, embora isto não seja uma garantia de que todos os arquivos +da partição foram movidos para fora da área que está prestes a ser usada. É +altamente recomendável fazer backup de seus arquivos pessoais. + + + + Apagar e utilizar o Disco Inteiro. + + Esta opção utilizará a unidade completa para a Mageia. + + Atenção! Esta operação apagará todos os dados do disco rígido +selecionado. Tenha cuidado! + + Se você pretende utilizar parte do disco rígido para finalidade, ou você já +tem dados na unidade que você não deseja perder, então não utilize esta +opção. + + + + Personalizado + + Isso lhe dará total controle sobre o local da instalação em seu(s) disco(s) +rígido(s). + + + + + Alguns discos mais recentes, estão usando setores lógicos de 4096 bytes, ao +invés do padrão anterior de 512 bytes. Em razão da indisponibilidade de +hardware, o programa de particionamento usado na instalação, ainda não foi +testado com discos deste tipo. Também alguns discos ssd agora utilizam um +erase block com mais de 1 MB. Se você possui um disco deste tipo, sugerimos +o pré-particionamento do disco, usando um programa de particionamento +alternativo, tipo o gparted, e use a seguinte configuração: + + "Arredondar para" "MiB" + + "Espaço livre Antes (MiB)" "2" + + Certifique-se também que todas as partições tenham sido criadas com um +número par de megabytes. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc793ec7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +
+ + + Parabéns + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Você terminou de instalar e configurar a Mageia e +agora é seguro remover a mídia de instalação e reiniciar o seu computador. + + Depois de reiniciar, você poderá escolher, na tela do gerenciador de +inicialização, entre os sistemas operacionais instalados no seu computador +(se você tiver mais de um). + + Se você não ajustar as configurações no Gerenciador de Inicialização, sua +instalação Mageia será automaticamente selecionada e iniciada. + + Divirta-se! + + Visite o site www.mageia.org se você tiver dúvidas ou quiser contribuir para +a Mageia. + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cbcc4291 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +
+ + + Formatação + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Aqui você pode escolher qual(s) partição(s) que deseja formatar. Quaisquer +dados nas partições marcadas para formatação não serão +salvos. + + Normalmente, pelo menos as partições DrakX selecionados precisam ser +formatadas. + + Clique em Avançado para escolher as partições que +você deseja verificar os chamados bad blocks. + + + Se você não tem certeza de ter feito a escolha certa, você pode clicar em +Anterior, novamente em +Anterior e, em seguida, +Personalizar para voltar à tela principal. Nessa tela +você pode escolher para ver o que está em suas partições. + + + Quando você estiver confiante em relação a seleção, clique em +Próximo para continuar. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8960f47a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + +
Atualizações + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Desde que esta versão da Mageia foi lançada, +alguns pacotes foram atualizados ou melhorados. + + Escolha sim se você deseja fazer o download e +instalá-los, selecione não se você não quer fazer isso +agora, ou se você não estiver conectado à Internet. + + Em seguida, pressione Próximo para continuar. + +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8df2d226 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +DrakX, o Instalador da Mageia + + + Se você é novo no GNU-Linux ou um usuário experiente, o Instalador da Mageia +foi feito para ajudar a fazer sua instalação ou atualização tão fácil quando +possível. + + + + +A tela do menu inicial tem várias opções, porém a opção padrão irá iniciar o +instalador, que será, normalmente, tudo o que você irá precisar. + +
+ + Primeira Tela da Instalação + + +
+ + Se houver problemas durante a instalação, então pode ser necessário usar +opções de instalação especiais, consulte . + +
+ + As etapas de instalação + + + O processo de instalação é dividido em um número de passos, o que pode ser +seguido no painel lateral da tela. + + Cada passo tem uma ou mais telas que também podem ter botões +Avançados com opções extras, menos comumente +necessárias. + + A maioria das telas tem botões de Ajuda que contém +explicações sobre a etapa atual. + + + Se em algum momento durante a instalação, você decidir interromper a +instalação, é possível reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de +fazer isso. Uma vez que a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações +começaram a ser instaladas, o computador não está mais no mesmo estado e +reiniciar ele poderá deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar disto, +você está muito certo de que reiniciar é o que você quer, vá para um +terminal de texto e pressione as três teclas Ctrl Alt F2 + ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso, pressione Ctrl Alt +Delete simultaneamente, para reiniciar. + +
+ +
+ + Opções de Instalação + + + Se a instalação falhar, então pode ser necessário tentar de novo usando uma +das opções extras disponíveis pressionando F1 +(Help). Veja em Tela de Ajuda +da Instalação + + Isto abrirá o seguinte ajuda em modo texto. + +
+ + Tela de Ajuda da Instalação + + +
+ +
+ + Problemas de Instalação e Possíveis Soluções + + +
+ + Sem Interface Gráfica + + + + + Após a tela inicial, você não chegou na tela de seleção de idioma. Isto +pode acontecer com algumas placas de vídeos e sistemas antigos. Tente usar +uma resolução baixa teclando vgalo na tela de prompt +(modo-texto). + + + + Se o hardware é muito antigo, uma instalação gráfica pode não ser +possível. Neste caso, vale a pena tentar uma instalação em modo de texto. +Para usar esta opção, tecle ESC na primeira tela de boas-vindas e confirme +com ENTER. Aparecerá para você uma tela preta com a palavra "boot:". Tecle +"text" e clique ENTER. Agora continue com a instalação em modo-texto. + + +
+ +
+ + A Instalação Congela + + + Se o sistema parece congelar durante a instalação, isto pode ser um problema +com a detecção de hardware. Neste caso, a detecção automática de hardware +pode ser ignorada e tratada mais tarde. Para tentar desta forma, tecle +noauto no prompt (tela modo-texto). Esta opção pode também ser +combinada com outras opções, conforme necessário. +
+ +
+ + Opções do Kernel + + + Estas raramente serão necessárias, mas em alguns casos, o hardware pode +relatar a memória RAM disponível de forma incorreta. Para especificar isso +manualmente, você pode usar o parâmetro mem=xxxM, onde xxx é o +a correta quantidade de RAM. Por exemplo mem=256M irá +especificar 256MB de RAM. +
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb4a8819 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +
+ + Seleção de Mídia (Nonfree) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Aqui você tem uma lista dos repositórios disponíveis. Nem todos os +repositórios estarão disponíveis, dependendo do tipo de mídia que você +estiver usando para a instalação. A seleção do repositório determinará quais +pacotes estarão disponíveis para seleção durante os próximos passos. + + + + O repositório Core não pode ser desabilitado uma vez +que ele contém a base da distribuição. + + + + O repositório Non-free inclui pacotes que são +gratuitos, ou seja, a Mageia pode redistribuí-los, mas eles contêm +código-fonte fechado (daí o nome - Nonfree). Por exemplo, este repositório +inclui drivers proprietários para placas de vídeo nVidia e ATI, firmware +para várias placas WiFi, etc. + + + + O repositório Tainted inclui pacotes distribuídos sob +licença livre. O principal critério para colocar pacotes neste repositório é +que eles podem infringir patentes e leis de direitos autorais em alguns +países, por exemplo, codecs multimídia necessários para reproduzir vários +arquivos de áudio/video; pacotes necessários para reproduzir DVD de vídeo +comercial, etc. + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..274cae3b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +
+ + + + Instalação Mínima + + + + + + Você pode escolher uma instalação mínima desmarcando todas as seleções na +tela Seleção do Grupo de Pacotes, ver . + A instalação mínima é destinado para aqueles com usos específicos em mente +para sua Mageia, como um servidor ou estação de +trabalho especializado. Você provavelmente irá utilizar esta opção, +combinada com a seleção manual de pacotes, ver . + Se você escolher esta classe de instalação, em seguida, a próxima tela irá +oferecer-lhe alguns pacotes extras úteis para instalar, tais como a +documentação e o X. + + + + + +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf01adb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +
+ + Resumo de diversos parâmetros + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + DrakX fez escolhas inteligentes para a configuração do seu sistema, +dependendo das escolhas que você fez e sobre o hardware detectado pelo +DrakX. Você pode verificar as configurações aqui e alterá-las se você +quiser, depois de pressionar Configurar. + +
+ + Parâmetros do Sistema + + + + + Fuso horário + + DrakX seleciona um fuso horário para você, dependendo de seu idioma +preferido. Você pode mudá-lo se necessário. ver também + + + + País / Região + + Se você não está no país selecionado, é muito importante que você corrija a +configuração. Ver + + + + Gerenciador de Inicialização + + DrakX fez boas opções para a configuração do gerenciador de inicialização. + + Não altere nada, a menos que você saiba como configurar o Grub e/ou o Lilo + + Para mais informações, consulte + + + + Gerenciamento de usuário + + Você pode adicionar usuários extras aqui. Cada um deles irão receber seus +próprios diretórios na pasta /home. + + + + Serviços: + + Serviços do sistema referem-se aos pequenos programas que rodam no +background (daemons). Esta ferramenta permite habilitar ou desabilitar +certas tarefas. + + Você deve verificar cuidadosamente antes de alterar qualquer coisa aqui - um +erro pode impedir o seu computador de funcionar corretamente. + + Para mais informações, consulte + + +
+ +
+ + Parâmetro de Hardware + + + + + Teclado: + + Isto é onde você configura ou altera o layout do teclado, que vai depender +do seu Idioma, localização ou tipo de teclado. + + + + Mouse: + + Aqui você pode adicionar ou configurar outros dispositivos apontadores, +tablets, trackballs, etc + + + + Placa de Som: + + Esta seção permite-lhe fazer o ajuste fino da sua placa de som. Na maioria +dos casos, as opções selecionadas irão funcionar com seu computador. + + + + Interface Gráfica: + + Esta secção permite-lhe configurar sua placa(s) de vídeo(s) e monitores. + + Para mais informação, consulte . + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + Parâmetros de rede e internet + + + + + Rede: + + Você pode configurar sua rede aqui, mas para placas de rede com drivers +não-livres é melhor fazer isso depois de reiniciar, no Centro +de Controle Mageia, após ter habilitado as mídias dos +repositórios não-livres. + + + Quando você adiciona uma placa de rede, não se esqueça de configurar o seu +firewall para ver aquela interface também. + + + + + Proxies: + + Um Servidor Proxy atua como um intermediário entre o computador e a +Internet. Esta secção permite-lhe configurar o computador para utilizar um +serviço proxy. + + Você pode precisar consultar o seu administrador de sistemas para obter os +parâmetros que você precisa inserir aqui. + + +
+ +
+ + Segurança + + + + + Nível de Segurança: + + Aqui você define o Nível de Segurança para seu computador, na maioria dos +casos, a configuração padrão (Standard) é adequada para uso geral. + + Verifique a opção que melhor se adapta ao seu uso. + + + + Firewall: + + Um firewall pretende ser uma barreira entre seus dados importantes e os +patifes lá fora, na internet, que possam comprometer ou roubar eles. + + Selecione os serviços que você deseja que tenha acesso ao seu sistema. Suas +opções vão depender de para que você usa seu computador. + + + Ter em mente que permitir tudo (sem firewall) pode ser muito arriscado. + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0979aaa5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Redimensionar partição +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> + + + Você tem mais de uma partição do +Windows®. Escolha qual +deve ser reduzida para dar espaço para a instalação +Mageia. + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6416f26d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + +
+ + + + Nível de Segurança + + + + + + + + + + + + Você pode ajustar o seu nível de segurança aqui. + + Deixe as configurações padrão como estão, se você não sabe o que escolher. + + Após a instalação, sempre será possível ajustar as configurações de +segurança na aba Segurança do Centro de Controle +Mageia. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf7329ca --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + +
+ + + + + Selecione seu país / região + + + + + + + + + + + + + Selecione seu país ou região. Isso é importante para todos os tipos de +configurações, como a moeda e domínio regulador do wireless. Definir o país +errado pode levar a não ser capaz de usar uma rede sem fio. + + Se o seu país não está na lista, clique no botão Outros +Países e escolha seu país / região lá. + + + Se o seu país está apenas na lista Outros Países, +depois de clicar OK pode parecer um país de uma +primeira lista foi escolhida. Por favor, ignore isso, o DrakX seguirá sua +escolha real. + + +
+ + + Método de entrada + + + Na tela Outros Países você também pode selecionar um +método de entrada (na parte inferior da lista). Métodos de entrada permitem +a entrada de caracteres multilíngues (chinês, japonês, coreano, etc). IBus é +o método de entrada padrão nos DVDs e nos live-CDs da Mageia para a +África/Índia e Ásia/no-Índia. Para idiomas asiáticos e africanos, o IBus +será definido como método de entrada padrão para que os usuários não +precisem configurá-lo manualmente. Outros métodos de entrada (SCIM, gcin, +HIME, etc) também oferecem funções semelhantes e podem ser instalados se +você adicionou as mídias HTTP/FTP antes da seleção do pacote. + + + Se você perdeu a configuração do método de entrada durante a instalação, +você pode acessá-lo depois de inicializar o sistema instalado, acessando +"Configure seu Computador" -> "Sistema", ou executando localedrake +(gerenciador de localização/idiomas) como root. + +
+
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c8955bd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Instalar ou atualizar + + + + + + + + Instalar + + Utilize esta opção para uma nova instalação +Mageia. . + + + + Atualizar + + Se você tem uma ou mais instalações da Mageia 2 +em seu sistema, o instalador irá permitir que você atualize uma delas para a +última versão. + + + + + Se durante a instalação você decidir interromper a instalação, é possível +reiniciar, mas por favor, pense duas vezes antes de fazer isso. Uma vez que +a partição tenha sido formatada ou atualizações começaram a ser instaladas, +o computador não estará mais no mesmo estado e reiniciar ele poderia muito +bem deixá-lo com um sistema inutilizável. Se, apesar isso, você está muito +certo de você quer reiniciar, vá para um terminal de texto, pressione as +três teclas Alt Ctrl F2, ao mesmo tempo. Depois disso, +pressione Alt Ctrl Delete simultaneamente para +reiniciar. + + + + Se você descobriu que você esqueceu de selecionar um idioma adicional, você +pode retornar a partir da tela "Instalar ou Atualizar" para a tela de +escolha de idioma pressionando Alt Ctrl +Home. Não faça isso mais tarde na +instalação. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a1716d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + +Teclado + + + DrakX seleciona um teclado adequado ao seu idioma. Se nenhum teclado +adequado for encontrado, ele será o padrão para um layout de teclado dos +EUA. + + + + + + + + Certifique-se que a seleção está correta ou escolha outro layout de +teclado. Se você não sabe qual o layout do seu teclado possui, procure nas +especificações que acompanham o sistema ou peça ao fornecedor do +computador. Pode até haver uma etiqueta no teclado que identifica o +layout. Você também pode procurar aqui:en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout + + + + Se o seu teclado não está na lista exibida, clique em +Mais para obter uma lista completa, e selecionar o +seu teclado lá. + + + Depois de escolher um teclado a partir do diálogo +Mais, você vai voltar para a primeira caixa de +diálogo de escolha do teclado e vai parecer que um teclado daquela tela foi +escolhido. Você pode ignorar esta anomalia e continuar a instalação: O +teclado é aquele que você escolheu da lista completa. + + + + + Se você escolher um teclado baseado em caracteres não latinos, você verá uma +tela de diálogo extra perguntando como você prefere alternar entre os +layouts de teclados latinos e não latinos. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5925cff --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Por favor, escolha um idioma para usar + + + Selecione o seu idioma preferido, pela primeira ampliação da lista para o +seu continente. A Mageia irá utilizar essa +seleção durante a instalação e para o sistema instalado. + + Se é provável que você vai exigir vários idiomas instalado em seu sistema, +para si ou para outros usuários, então você deve usar o botão +Múltiplas linguagens para adicioná-los agora. Vai ser +difícil adicionar o suporte a idiomas adicionais após a instalação. + + + + + + Mesmo se você escolher mais de um idioma, você deve primeiro escolher um +deles como seu idioma preferido na primeira tela de idiomas. Também será +marcado como escolhido na tela de múltiplos idiomas. + + + + + Se o idioma do teclado não é o mesmo que o seu idioma preferido, então é +aconselhável instalar o idioma do teclado também. + + + + A Mageia usa UTF-8 (Unicode) por padrão. Isso pode ser desativado na tela +"múltiplas linguagens" se você sabe que é inadequado para o seu idioma. A +desativação do UTF-8 se aplicada a todos os idiomas instalados. + + + + Você pode alterar o idioma do seu sistema após a instalação no Centro de +Controle Mageia -> Sistema -> Gerenciar Localização para o seu Sistema. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a11575f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +
+ + + Selecione o mouse + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Se você não está feliz com a forma como o mouse responde, você pode +selecionar um diferente aqui. + + Geralmente, Universal - Qualquer mouse PS/2 +ou USB é uma boa escolha. + + Selecione Universal - Force evdev +para configurar os botões que não funcionam em um mouse com seis ou mais +botões. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c9e8b7b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +
+ + Principais Opções do Gerenciador de Inicialização + + + + + + + + + + Se você preferir que as configurações do gerenciador de inicialização +(bootloader) sejam diferentes daquelas escolhidas automaticamente pelo +instalador, você pode alterá-las aqui. + + Você pode já ter outro sistema operacional em sua máquina, neste caso, você +precisa decidir se deseja adicionar a Mageia no seu gerenciador de +inicialização existente, ou permitir que a Mageia crie um novo. + + + O menu gráfico da Mageia é ótimo :) + + +
+ + Usando o Gerenciador de Inicialização da Mageia + + + Por padrão a Mageia grava um novo gerenciador de inicialização (bootlader) +GRUB no MBR (Master Boot Record) do seu primeiro disco rígido. Se você já +tem outros sistemas operacionais instalados, a Mageia tentará adicioná-los +ao seu novo menu de inicialização. + + A Mageia agora oferece também o GRUB2 como gerenciador de inicialização +opcional, em adição ao GRUB original e Lilo. + + + Os sistemas Linux que utilizam o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2, +atualmente não são suportados pelo GRUB (original) e não serão reconhecidos +se for utilizado o GRUB padrão. + + A melhor solução neste caso é utilizar o gerenciador de inicialização GRUB2 +que está disponível na página de resumo durante a instalação. + +
+ +
+ + Usando um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente + + + Se você decidir usar um Gerenciador de Inicialização existente, então você +precisa se lembrar de PARAR na página de resumo durante a instalação e +clicar no botão Configurar "Gerenciador de +Inicialização", o que permitirá que você mude o local de instalação do +Gerenciador de Inicialização. + + Não selecione um dispositivo, por exemplo, "sda", ou você irá substituir sua +MBR existente. Você deve selecionar a partição que você escolheu durante a +fase de particionamento anterior, por exemplo: sda7. + + Para ficar claro, sda é um dispositivo, sda7 é uma partição. + + + Ir para tty2 com Ctrl+Alt+F2 e tecle df para verificar +onde a partição / (raiz) está. Ctrl+Alt+F7 leva você de +volta para a tela do instalador. + + + O procedimento exato para adicionar o seu sistema Mageia ao Gerenciador de +Inicialização existente, está além do escopo desta ajuda, no entanto, na +maioria dos casos irá envolver a execução adequado de um programa de +instalação do Gerenciador de Inicialização, que deve detectá-lo e +adicioná-lo automaticamente. Consulte a documentação para o sistema +operacional em questão. +
+ +
+ + Opções Avançadas do Gerenciador de Inicialização + + + Se você tiver espaço em disco muito limitado para a partição +/ (raiz) que contém /tmp, clique em +Avançado e marque a caixa Limpar /tmp a +cada inicialização. Isto ajuda a obter algum espaço livre +adicional. +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fd5321db --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + +
Adicionando ou Modificando uma Entrada do Menu de Inicialização + + + + + + + + + Você pode adicionar uma entrada ou modificar a que você selecionar primeiro, +pressionando o botão correspondente na janela de Configuração do +Menu de Inicialização e editando a janela que abrir em cima dela. + + + + + + Algumas coisas que podem ser feitas sem qualquer risco são, mudar o rótulo +de uma entrada e selecionar a caixa de uma entrada para torná-la padrão. + Você pode adicionar o número da versão correta de uma entrada, ou renomeá-la +completamente. + A entrada padrão vai inicializar o sistema se você não fizer uma escolha +durante a inicialização. +Editar outras coisas pode fazer com que o sistema não inicie. Por favor, não +tente algo sem saber o que está fazendo. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa21c9a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + +
+ + + Detecção de disco rígido + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + O DrakX normalmente detecta discos rígidos corretamente. Pode, contudo, não +detectar alguns controladores de disco SCSI antigos e, portanto, deixar de +instalar os drivers necessários. + + Se isso acontecer, você terá que manualmente dizer ao Drakx qual o +dispositivo(s) SCSI que você tem. + + O DrakX deve então ser capaz de configurar o dispositivo(s) corretamente. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eea74877 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/pt_BR/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +
+ + + Confirme o disco rígido para ser formatado + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Clique em Anterior se você não tem certeza sobre sua +escolha. + + Clique em Avançar se você tem certeza e deseja apagar +todas as partições, cada sistema operacional e todos os dados no disco +rígido. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr.po b/docs/installer/tr.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d85ecbc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr.po @@ -0,0 +1,3272 @@ +# Turkish translation of Mageia Installer Help +# Copyright (C) YEAR Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Installer Help\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-05-16 20:28+0400\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: Turkish \n" +"Language: tr\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. type: Content of:
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:32 +msgid "License and Release Notes" +msgstr "License and Release Notes" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"license.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" width=\"800\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:45 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "License Agreement" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license " +"terms and conditions carefully." +msgstr "" +"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license " +"terms and conditions carefully." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51 +msgid "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</" +"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue." +msgstr "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</" +"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:55 +msgid "" +"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:58 +msgid "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. " +"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer." +msgstr "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. " +"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:68 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "Release Notes" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:75 +msgid "" +"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, " +"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" +"To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, " +"click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:4 +msgid "User and Superuser Management" +msgstr "User and Superuser Management" + +#. Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but +#. changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing +#. about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or +#. disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous +#. screen), marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand +#. "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? +#. JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading +#. marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot +#. marja 2013-04-26 added new note +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/addUser.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" " +"width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:34 +msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:" +msgstr "Set Administrator (root) Password:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:38 +msgid "" +"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to " +"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the " +"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the " +"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green " +"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are " +"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped " +"the first password by comparing them." +msgstr "" +"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to " +"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the " +"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the " +"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green " +"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are " +"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped " +"the first password by comparing them." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:48 +msgid "" +"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." +msgstr "" +"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:56 +msgid "Enter a user" +msgstr "Enter a user" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:59 +msgid "" +"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but " +"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and " +"anything else the average user does with his computer" +msgstr "" +"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but " +"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and " +"anything else the average user does with his computer" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the " +"users icon." +msgstr "" +"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the " +"users icon." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:70 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text " +"box." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text " +"box." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:75 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let " +"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case " +"sensitive.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let " +"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case " +"sensitive.</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:81 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user " +"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the " +"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user " +"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the " +"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:87 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this " +"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user " +"password text boxes." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this " +"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user " +"password text boxes." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:94 +msgid "" +"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but " +"write protected) home directory." +msgstr "" +"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but " +"write protected) home directory." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:97 +msgid "" +"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - " +"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that " +"is both read and write protected." +msgstr "" +"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - " +"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that " +"is both read and write protected." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:101 +msgid "" +"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised " +"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot." +msgstr "" +"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised " +"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:105 +msgid "" +"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all " +"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step " +"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>." +msgstr "" +"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all " +"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step " +"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:109 +msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." +msgstr "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:116 +msgid "Advanced User Management" +msgstr "Advanced User Management" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:119 +msgid "" +"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a " +"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. " +"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account." +msgstr "" +"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a " +"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding. " +"Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account " +"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest " +"should save his important files to a USB key." +msgstr "" +"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account " +"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest " +"should save his important files to a USB key." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a " +"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, " +"but he has more restricted access than normal users." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a " +"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, " +"but he has more restricted access than normal users." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:138 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the " +"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are " +"Bash, Dash and Sh" +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the " +"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are " +"Bash, Dash and Sh" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:144 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you " +"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless " +"you know what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you " +"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless " +"you know what you are doing." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID. Also a " +"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know " +"what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID. Also a " +"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know " +"what you are doing." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:11 +msgid "Choose the mount points" +msgstr "Choose the mount points" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" +#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) +#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes +#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans +#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it +#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) +#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" +"\" align=\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=" +"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you " +"can change the mount points." +msgstr "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you " +"can change the mount points." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> " +"(root) partition." +msgstr "" +"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> " +"(root) partition." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point" +"\", \"Type\")." +msgstr "" +"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point" +"\", \"Type\")." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49 +msgid "" +"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], " +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")." +msgstr "" +"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], " +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55 +msgid "" +"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from " +"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> " +"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for " +"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store " +"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</" +"literal> partition of a cauldron install." +msgstr "" +"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from " +"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> " +"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for " +"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store " +"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</" +"literal> partition of a cauldron install." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:65 +msgid "" +"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount " +"point field blank." +msgstr "" +"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount " +"point field blank." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:71 +msgid "" +"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, " +"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen " +"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size." +msgstr "" +"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, " +"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen " +"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) " +"DrakX suggests, or more." +msgstr "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) " +"DrakX suggests, or more." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:18 +msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" +msgstr "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:21 +msgid "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." +msgstr "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:29 +msgid "" +"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will " +"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need." +msgstr "" +"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will " +"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need." + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:35 +msgid "Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "Installation Welcome Screen" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:39 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\" align=" +"\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"BId-drakx-" +"intro-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/installer.xml:34 en/installer.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use " +"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></" +"xref>." +msgstr "" +"If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use " +"special installation options, see <xref linkend=\"installationOptions\"></" +"xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:52 +msgid "The installation steps" +msgstr "The installation steps" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed " +"on the side panel of the screen." +msgstr "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed " +"on the side panel of the screen." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options." +msgstr "" +"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further " +"explanations about the current step." +msgstr "" +"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further " +"explanations about the current step." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/installer.xml:66 +msgid "" +"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is " +"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure " +"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" +"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is " +"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure " +"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:80 +msgid "Installation options" +msgstr "Installation options" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:83 +msgid "" +"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one " +"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</" +"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>" +msgstr "" +"If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one " +"of the extra options available by hitting the <guibutton>F1 (Help)</" +"guibutton> key see <xref linkend=\"dx-welcome\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:87 +msgid "This will open the following text based help." +msgstr "This will open the following text based help." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:91 +msgid "Installation Help Screen" +msgstr "Installation Help Screen" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\" align=" +"\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"installer-" +"im2\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:105 +msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" +msgstr "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:111 +msgid "No Graphical Interface" +msgstr "No Graphical Interface" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:116 +msgid "" +"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. " +"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low " +"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt." +msgstr "" +"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. " +"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low " +"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit " +"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be " +"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit " +"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit " +"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be " +"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit " +"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.<emphasis></emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:135 +msgid "The Install Freezes" +msgstr "The Install Freezes" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:138 +msgid "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of " +"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with " +"other options as necessary." +msgstr "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of " +"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with " +"other options as necessary." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:147 +msgid "Kernel Options" +msgstr "Kernel Options" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:150 +msgid "" +"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e." +"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM." +msgstr "" +"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e." +"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:23 +msgid "Install or Upgrade" +msgstr "Install or Upgrade" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectinstallClass.png\" align=" +"\"center\" width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:34 +msgid "Install" +msgstr "Install" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:36 +msgid "" +"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation." +msgstr "" +"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41 +msgid "Upgrade" +msgstr "Upgrade" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43 +msgid "" +"If you have one or more <application>Mageia 2</application> installations on " +"your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the " +"latest release." +msgstr "" +"If you have one or more previous installations of <application>Mageia</" +"application> on your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of " +"them to the latest release." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to " +"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been " +"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in " +"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an " +"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you " +"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl " +"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</" +"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" +"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to " +"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been " +"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in " +"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an " +"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you " +"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl " +"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</" +"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot." + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice " +"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</" +"emphasis> do this later in the install." +msgstr "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice " +"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</" +"emphasis> do this later in the install." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:14 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "Keyboard" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:17 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." +msgstr "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"selectKeyboard.png\" width=\"800\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</" +"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there." +msgstr "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</" +"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45 +msgid "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though " +"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly " +"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the " +"full list." +msgstr "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though " +"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly " +"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the " +"full list." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:55 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin " +"and non-Latin keyboard layouts" +msgstr "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin " +"and non-Latin keyboard layouts" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureServices.xml:12 +msgid "Configure your Services" +msgstr "Configure your Services" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureServices.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system." +msgstr "" +"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:30 +msgid "" +"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and " +"see all services in it." +msgstr "" +"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and " +"see all services in it." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:34 +msgid "The setting DrakX chose are usually good." +msgstr "The setting DrakX chose are usually good." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." +msgstr "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:41 +msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." +msgstr "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:23 +msgid "Please choose a language to use" +msgstr "Please choose a language to use" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during " +"the installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during " +"the installation and for your installed system." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:30 +msgid "" +"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your " +"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the " +"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be " +"difficult to add extra language support after installation." +msgstr "" +"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your " +"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the " +"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be " +"difficult to add extra language support after installation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" " +"width=\"100%\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them " +"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be " +"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ." +msgstr "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them " +"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be " +"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:51 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well." +msgstr "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:57 +msgid "" +"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the " +"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your " +"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages." +msgstr "" +"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the " +"\"multiple languages\" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your " +"language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:64 +msgid "" +"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia " +"Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system." +msgstr "" +"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia " +"Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:4 +msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" +msgstr "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03 +#. test comment - johnr +#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct +#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I +#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD +#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG" +"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your " +"choice." +msgstr "" +"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your " +"choice." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every " +"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk." +msgstr "" +"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every " +"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:25 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "Partitioning" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the " +"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install " +"<application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the " +"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install " +"<application>Mageia</application>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:33 +msgid "" +"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your " +"particular hard drive(s) layout and content." +msgstr "" +"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your " +"particular hard drive(s) layout and content." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" +"\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"doPartitionDisks.png\" width=\"800\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:45 +msgid "Use Existing Partitions" +msgstr "Use Existing Partitions" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:48 +msgid "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." +msgstr "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:54 +msgid "Use Free Space" +msgstr "Use Free Space" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." +msgstr "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:62 +msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition" +msgstr "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it." +msgstr "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:69 +msgid "" +"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, " +"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all " +"important files!" +msgstr "" +"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, " +"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all " +"important files!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The " +"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to " +"back up your personal files." +msgstr "" +"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The " +"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to " +"back up your personal files." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:84 +msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk." +msgstr "Erase and use Entire Disk." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87 +msgid "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia." +msgstr "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:90 +msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!" +msgstr "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:93 +msgid "" +"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already " +"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use " +"this option." +msgstr "" +"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already " +"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use " +"this option." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:100 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "Custom" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102 +msgid "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:109 +msgid "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available " +"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested " +"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 " +"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning " +"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following " +"settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:117 +msgid "\"Align to\" \"MiB\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119 +#, fuzzy +msgid "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\"" +msgstr "Free space preceding (MiB) : 2" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:121 +msgid "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:5 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "Desktop Selection" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11 +msgid "" +"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine " +"tune your choice." +msgstr "" +"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine " +"tune your choice." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13 +msgid "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package " +"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the " +"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button" +msgstr "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package " +"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the " +"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or " +"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full " +"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if " +"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the " +"default software choices for these desktop environments. The " +"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, " +"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default." +msgstr "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or " +"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full " +"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if " +"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the " +"default software choices for these desktop environments. The " +"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, " +"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:4 +msgid "Package Group Selection" +msgstr "Package Group Selection" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." +msgstr "" +"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23 +msgid "Workstation." +msgstr "Workstation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27 +msgid "Server." +msgstr "Server." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31 +msgid "Graphical Environment." +msgstr "Graphical Environment." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or " +"remove packages." +msgstr "" +"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or " +"remove packages." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do " +"a minimal install." +msgstr "" +"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do " +"a minimal install." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:4 +msgid "Choose Individual Packages" +msgstr "Choose Individual Packages" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation." +msgstr "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20 +msgid "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</" +"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving " +"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same " +"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and " +"choosing to load it." +msgstr "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</" +"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving " +"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same " +"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and " +"choosing to load it." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:19 +msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake" +msgstr "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you " +"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The " +"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be " +"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable." +msgstr "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you " +"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The " +"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be " +"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, " +"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what " +"is in them before you start." +msgstr "" +"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, " +"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what " +"is in them before you start." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:42 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an " +"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them." +msgstr "" +"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an " +"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected " +"storage device" +msgstr "" +"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected " +"storage device" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it." +msgstr "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:49 +msgid "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes." +msgstr "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:51 +msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready." +msgstr "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:4 +msgid "Congratulations" +msgstr "Congratulations" + +#. Started by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! +#. marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text +#. same day, added "s" to "sytems" +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</" +"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot " +"your computer." +msgstr "" +"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</" +"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot " +"your computer." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:25 +msgid "" +"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating " +"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)." +msgstr "" +"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating " +"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." +msgstr "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:31 +msgid "Enjoy!" +msgstr "Enjoy!" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to " +"Mageia" +msgstr "" +"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to " +"Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:4 +msgid "Formatting" +msgstr "Formatting" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" " +"width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved." +msgstr "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:29 +msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted" +msgstr "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to " +"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to " +"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> " +"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen. " +"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions." +msgstr "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> " +"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen. " +"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> to continue." +msgstr "" +"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> to continue." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:3 +msgid "Updates" +msgstr "Updates" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 30 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename +#. marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some " +"packages will have been updated or improved." +msgstr "" +"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some " +"packages will have been updated or improved." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, " +"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" +msgstr "" +"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, " +"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:28 +msgid "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue" +msgstr "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:3 +msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters" +msgstr "Summary of miscellaneous parameters" + +#. Started by marja on 2012 03 31 +#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! +#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots +#. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-) +#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages +#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and +#. the drakxid-miscellaneous section +#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph +#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph +#. 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. +#. 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" width=" +"\"800\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=\"summary-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:38 +msgid "" +"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want after pressing " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want after pressing " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:45 +msgid "System parameters" +msgstr "System parameters" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:50 +msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:52 +msgid "" +"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. " +"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/" +">" +msgstr "" +"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. " +"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC" +"\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:58 +msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you " +"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>" +msgstr "" +"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you " +"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:67 +msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:69 +msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting." +msgstr "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo" +msgstr "" +"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:75 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>" +msgstr "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:80 +msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>" +msgstr "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:83 +msgid "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</" +"literal> directories." +msgstr "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</" +"literal> directories and will not be able to look in your or each other's " +"documents, mails, pictures and other files." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:89 +msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:91 +msgid "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks." +msgstr "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:95 +msgid "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly." +msgstr "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:99 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" +msgstr "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:106 +msgid "Hardware parameters" +msgstr "Hardware parameters" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:111 +msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:113 +msgid "" +"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on " +"your location, language or type of keyboard." +msgstr "" +"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on " +"your location, language or type of keyboard." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:119 +msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:121 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." +msgstr "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:126 +msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:129 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the " +"options selected will work with your computer." +msgstr "" +"This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the " +"options selected will work with your computer." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:135 +msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:138 +msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays." +msgstr "" +"This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:141 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>." +msgstr "" +"For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:147 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=" +"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" " +"align=\"center\" width=\"800\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=" +"\"summaryBottom-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:155 +msgid "Network and Internet parameters" +msgstr "Network and Internet parameters" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:161 +msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:163 +msgid "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia " +"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the non-free media " +"repositories." +msgstr "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia " +"Control Center</application>, after having enabled the non-free media " +"repositories." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:170 +msgid "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch " +"that interface as well." +msgstr "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch " +"that interface as well." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:177 +msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:179 +msgid "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." +msgstr "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:184 +msgid "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you " +"need to enter here" +msgstr "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you " +"need to enter here" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:193 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "Security" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:198 +msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:201 +msgid "" +"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default " +"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use." +msgstr "" +"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default " +"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:205 +msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage." +msgstr "Check the option which best suits your usage." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:210 +msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:" +msgstr "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:212 +msgid "" +"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the " +"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it." +msgstr "" +"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the " +"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your " +"selections will depend on what you use your computer for." +msgstr "" +"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your " +"selections will depend on what you use your computer for." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:221 +msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky." +msgstr "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:12 +msgid "Configure your Timezone" +msgstr "Configure your Timezone" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC." +"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC." +"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the " +"same time zone." +msgstr "" +"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the " +"same time zone." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:30 +msgid "" +"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to " +"GMT, also known as UTC." +msgstr "" +"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to " +"GMT, also known as UTC." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:35 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." +msgstr "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" +msgstr "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:11 +msgid "Setup SCSI" +msgstr "Setup SCSI" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 +#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) +#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the +#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" width=" +"\"100%\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-" +"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32 +msgid "" +"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers " +"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently " +"fail to recognise the drive." +msgstr "" +"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers " +"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently " +"fail to recognise the drive." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:36 +msgid "" +"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) " +"you have." +msgstr "" +"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) " +"you have." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39 +msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly." +msgstr "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:4 +msgid "Select mouse" +msgstr "Select mouse" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place +#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" width=\"100%\" depth=\"600\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:23 +msgid "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." +msgstr "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</" +"guilabel> is a good choice." +msgstr "" +"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</" +"guilabel> is a good choice." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to " +"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons." +msgstr "" +"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to " +"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:3 +msgid "Bootloader main options" +msgstr "Bootloader main options" + +#. 2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml, from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence. +#. 2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"100%\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" " +"fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=" +"\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:16 +msgid "" +"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by " +"the installer, you can change them here." +msgstr "" +"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by " +"the installer, you can change them here." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case " +"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or " +"allow Mageia to create a new one." +msgstr "" +"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case " +"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or " +"allow Mageia to create a new one." + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:26 +msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)" +msgstr "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32 +msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader" +msgstr "Using a Mageia bootloader" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36 +msgid "" +"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR " +"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other " +"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia " +"boot menu." +msgstr "" +"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR " +"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other " +"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia " +"boot menu." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB " +"legacy and Lilo." +msgstr "" +"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB " +"legacy and Lilo." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by " +"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is " +"used." +msgstr "" +"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by " +"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is " +"used." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:49 +msgid "" +"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at " +"the Summary page during installation." +msgstr "" +"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at " +"the Summary page during installation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:56 +msgid "Using an existing bootloader" +msgstr "Using an existing bootloader" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember " +"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the " +"bootloader install location." +msgstr "" +"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember " +"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader " +"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the " +"bootloader install location." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. " +"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning " +"phase earlier, e.g. sda7." +msgstr "" +"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. " +"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning " +"phase earlier, e.g. sda7." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71 +msgid "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device." +msgstr "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75 +msgid "" +"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where " +"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to " +"the installer screen." +msgstr "" +"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where " +"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to " +"the installer screen." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader " +"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve " +"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and " +"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in " +"question." +msgstr "" +"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader " +"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve " +"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and " +"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in " +"question." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:91 +msgid "Bootloader advanced option" +msgstr "Bootloader advanced option" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95 +msgid "" +"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition " +"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</" +"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space." +msgstr "" +"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition " +"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</" +"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space." + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1 en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2 +msgid "en" +msgstr "tr" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakX.xml:3 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "Installation with DrakX" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note> +#: en/DrakX.xml:6 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "<note>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:7 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:10 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "</note>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:16 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakX.xml:18 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16 +msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" +msgstr "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata width=\"800\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:" +"id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:26 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." +msgstr "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" +msgstr "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69 +msgid "vendor" +msgstr "vendor" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:36 +msgid "then the name of your card" +msgstr "then the name of your card" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:40 +msgid "and the type of card" +msgstr "and the type of card" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44 +msgid "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"Xorg category" +msgstr "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"Xorg category" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card " +"drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the " +"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities." +msgstr "" +"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card " +"drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the " +"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the Commandline Interface." +msgstr "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the Commandline Interface." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55 +msgid "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some " +"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites" +msgstr "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some " +"cases only from the card manufacturers' websites" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:59 +msgid "" +"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to " +"access them, you should do this after your first reboot." +msgstr "" +"The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to " +"access them, you should do this after your first reboot." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18 +msgid "Choosing your Monitor" +msgstr "Choosing your Monitor" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:21 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." +msgstr "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage " +"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing " +"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor " +"documentation" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage " +"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing " +"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor " +"documentation" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" depth=\"600\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"configureX_monitor.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" width=\"800\" xml:id=" +"\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42 +msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." +msgstr "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:49 +msgid "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:55 +msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:58 +msgid "" +"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the " +"monitor database." +msgstr "" +"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the " +"monitor database." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63 +msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:" +msgstr "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:73 +msgid "the monitor manufacturers name" +msgstr "the monitor manufacturers name" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:77 +msgid "the monitor description" +msgstr "the monitor description" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:82 +msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84 +msgid "" +"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as " +"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is " +"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver " +"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it " +"may be wise to be conservative in your selections." +msgstr "" +"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as " +"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is " +"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver " +"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it " +"may be wise to be conservative in your selections." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4 +msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration" +msgstr "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration" + +#. Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </" +"imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +"\" width=\"100%\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" depth=\"600\" xml:id=" +"\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18 +msgid "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are " +"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window " +"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for " +"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or " +"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</" +"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can " +"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you " +"think the choice is incorrect." +msgstr "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are " +"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window " +"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for " +"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or " +"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</" +"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can " +"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you " +"think the choice is incorrect." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card " +"from the list if needed." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card " +"from the list if needed." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:37 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose " +"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor " +"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. " +"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the " +"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose " +"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor " +"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. " +"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the " +"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:45 +msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor" +msgstr "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:51 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired " +"resolution and color depth of your monitor here." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired " +"resolution and color depth of your monitor here." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not " +"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your " +"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your " +"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. " +"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be " +"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure " +"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not " +"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your " +"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your " +"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. " +"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be " +"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure " +"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</" +"emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to " +"enable or disable various options." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to " +"enable or disable various options." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:5 +msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" +msgstr "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" " +"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the " +"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen " +"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it." +msgstr "" +"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the " +"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen " +"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=" +"\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" width=\"800\" depth=\"600\" format=\"PNG\" " +"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an " +"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one." +msgstr "" +"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an " +"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely." +msgstr "" +"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a " +"choice while booting up." +msgstr "" +"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a " +"choice while booting up." + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:29 +msgid "" +"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't " +"just try something without knowing what you are doing." +msgstr "" +"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't " +"just try something without knowing what you are doing." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:3 +msgid "Minimal Install" +msgstr "Minimal Install" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:9 +msgid "" +"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the " +"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></" +"xref>." +msgstr "" +"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the " +"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></" +"xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised " +"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package " +"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>." +msgstr "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised " +"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package " +"Selection, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer " +"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X." +msgstr "" +"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer " +"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X." + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:12 +msgid "Security Level" +msgstr "Security Level" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:24 +msgid "You can adjust your security level here." +msgstr "You can adjust your security level here." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose." +msgstr "" +"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:30 +msgid "" +"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings " +"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center." +msgstr "" +"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings " +"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:13 +msgid "Select your Country / Region" +msgstr "Select your Country / Region" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network." +msgstr "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:32 +msgid "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</" +"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there." +msgstr "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</" +"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there." + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, " +"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the " +"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real " +"choice." +msgstr "" +"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, " +"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the " +"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real " +"choice." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:46 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "Input method" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:49 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-" +"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method " +"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, " +"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you " +"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." +msgstr "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-" +"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method " +"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, " +"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you " +"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -> " +"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root." +msgstr "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -> " +"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/media_selection.xml:3 +msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)" +msgstr "Media Selection (Nonfree)" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media) +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong) +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/media_selection.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." +msgstr "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:25 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." +msgstr "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:30 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." +msgstr "" +"The <emphasis>Non-free</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:38 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD, etc." +msgstr "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD, etc." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:10 +msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)" +msgstr "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-" +"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The " +"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection " +"during the next steps." +msgstr "" +"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The " +"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection " +"during the next steps." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29 +msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" +msgstr "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:33 +msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up." +msgstr "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up." + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With " +"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS " +"installation." +msgstr "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With " +"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS " +"installation." + +#~ msgid "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>" +#~ msgstr "Choose hard disk to erase for <application>Mageia</application>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install " +#~ "<application>Mageia</application>." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Select the hard disk that should be formatted to install " +#~ "<application>Mageia</application>." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk " +#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Be sure to select the correct hard disk. All data on the selected disk " +#~ "will be lost. This step can not be undone." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you have a SSD (Solid State Drive) instead of a hard disk, at the time " +#~ "this help was written, it was inadvisable to create the partitions with " +#~ "this tool because they would not be aligned. The SSD would work but with " +#~ "reduced speed and lifetime. Use a partitioning tool such as Gparted " +#~ "instead with these partition alignment settings for each partition :" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If you have a SSD (Solid State Drive) instead of a hard disk, at the time " +#~ "this help was written, it was inadvisable to create the partitions with " +#~ "this tool because they would not be aligned. The SSD would work but with " +#~ "reduced speed and lifetime. Use a partitioning tool such as Gparted " +#~ "instead with these partition alignment settings for each partition :" + +#~ msgid "Round to cylinders : unchecked" +#~ msgstr "Round to cylinders : unchecked" + +#~ msgid "Bootloader main options (old page)" +#~ msgstr "Bootloader main options (old page)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because " +#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main " +#~ "options''' screen in installer links to." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"></xref> because " +#~ "that page has the filename the help button in the '''Bootloader main " +#~ "options''' screen in installer links to." + +#~ msgid "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)" +#~ msgstr "Set up X, graphic card and monitor configuration (old page)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> " +#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card " +#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "This page was moved to <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"></xref> " +#~ "because that page has the filename the help button in the '''Graphic Card " +#~ "and Monitor Configuration''' screen in installer links to." + +#~ msgid "Bootloader expert use" +#~ msgstr "Bootloader expert use" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/" +#~ "> first." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If you haven't done so yet, please read <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/" +#~ "> first." + +#~ msgid "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually" +#~ msgstr "Adding a GRUB2 based system manually" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "A GRUB2 based system may be added to the Mageia boot menu as follows:" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version " +#~ "run the following command in a terminal:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Boot into the system in question. In order to determine the GRUB2 version " +#~ "run the following command in a terminal:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub-install --version</literal>" + +#~ msgid "or if that fails try:" +#~ msgstr "or if that fails try:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sudo grub2-install --version</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom " +#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 " +#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during " +#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If this returns \"GNU GRUB version 0.97\" (possibly with a custom " +#~ "suffix), then it is using GRUB (otherwise called GRUB legacy) not GRUB2 " +#~ "and your system should be correctly identified by Mageia during " +#~ "installation and added automatically to the menu." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If this returns (GRUB) 1.98 or 1.99 or 2.xx, then you are using GRUB2." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root " +#~ "partition:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Make a note of the version and enter this command to identify the root " +#~ "partition:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h / |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" + +#~ msgid "This will output something like :" +#~ msgstr "This will output something like :" + +#~ msgid "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>/dev/sdb11</literal>" + +#~ msgid "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it." +#~ msgstr "sdb11 is the root partition - make a note of it." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the " +#~ "following command:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Now check that the /boot folder is in the same partition by entering the " +#~ "following command:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>df -h /boot |(read; awk '{print $1; exit}')</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a " +#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu." +#~ "lst below." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If the /boot partition is different to the root partition then make a " +#~ "note and use the /boot partition in the \"root\" line when editing menu." +#~ "lst below." + +#~ msgid "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia." +#~ msgstr "You can now shut down the system and install Mageia." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the " +#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "In your new running Mageia system, open a terminal and as root edit the " +#~ "file /boot/grub/menu.lst as follows:" + +#~ msgid "To become root use:" +#~ msgstr "To become root use:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>su -</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>su -</literal>" + +#~ msgid "(enter root password)" +#~ msgstr "(enter root password)" + +#~ msgid "To open the file in an editor use:" +#~ msgstr "To open the file in an editor use:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kwrite /boot/grub/menu.lst</literal>" + +#~ msgid "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)" +#~ msgstr "(replace \"kwrite\" with \"gedit\" if you are using Gnome)" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the " +#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on " +#~ "its position in the file:" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Add the following entry for your (e.g. Ubuntu) system, possibly as the " +#~ "second stanza. The position the item appears in the menu will depend on " +#~ "its position in the file:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>title Ubuntu</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>root (hd1,10)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/core.img</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" " +#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy " +#~ "GRUB count from zero." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "In the second line, \"hd1\" means the second hard drive, the \"10\" " +#~ "indicates the 11th partition. Drives and partitions in Mageia's legacy " +#~ "GRUB count from zero." + +#~ msgid "Therefore:" +#~ msgstr "Therefore:" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sdb11 = (hd1,10)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>sda1 = (hd0,0)</literal>" + +#~ msgid "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :" +#~ msgstr "If the GRUB2 version is 2.xx then change the last line to :" + +#~ msgid "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>" +#~ msgstr "<literal>kernel /boot/grub/i386-pc/core.img</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub" +#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If you needed to use \"grub2-install\" earlier then change <literal>\"grub" +#~ "\"</literal> to <literal>\"grub2\"</literal> in the last line." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</" +#~ "literal> from the last line." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If /boot was on a separate partition, then remove <literal>\"/boot\"</" +#~ "literal> from the last line." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in " +#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Save the file and re-boot. You should now see your \"Ubuntu\" entry in " +#~ "the menu and be able to boot from it." + +#~ msgid "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader" +#~ msgstr "Using an existing GRUB2 bootloader" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader " +#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "If you didn't read the general part about using an existing bootloader " +#~ "yet, do so now. See <xref linkend=\"usingExistingBootloader\"/>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some " +#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding " +#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details " +#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the " +#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "There is a known bug in OS-prober used during GRUB2 installation in some " +#~ "versions of Debian/Ubuntu that incorrectly creates grub.cfg when adding " +#~ "Mageia (or Mandriva) systems. This is simple to work around and details " +#~ "of a fix can be found in the Mageia forum. Search for \"prober\", the " +#~ "topic is \"grub problem\", post #9 has the information." + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel " +#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub." +#~ "d/40_custom</literal>" +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "To make the fix permanent so that it will survive an Ubuntu kernel " +#~ "update, the Mageia entry should be added to <literal>/etc/grub." +#~ "d/40_custom</literal>" + +#~ msgid "" +#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. " +#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the " +#~ "preferred solution." +#~ msgstr "" +#~ "Stop Press: The bug is fixed in os-prober-1.53 released on 8th May 2012. " +#~ "So now, upgrading to the new version in your GRUB2 installation is the " +#~ "preferred solution." diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7d3c61d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="tr" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Installation with DrakX + + + + No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing. + + + The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. + + This manual was produced with the help of the Calenco CMS developed by NeoDoc. + + It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact Documentation +Team, if you would like to help improve this manual. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..92717d14 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +License and Release Notes + + + + + +
+ + License Agreement + + + Before installing Mageia, please read the license +terms and conditions carefully. + + These terms and conditions apply to the entire +Mageia distribution and must be accepted before +you can continue. + + To accept, simply select Accept and then click on +Next. + + If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for +looking. Clicking Quit will reboot your computer. + + + +
+ +
+ + + Release Notes + + + + + To see what's new in this release of Mageia, +click on the Release Notes button. +
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f59bd404 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +
+ + + User and Superuser Management + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + Set Administrator (root) Password: + + + It is advisable for all Mageia installations to +set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the +root password in Linux. As you type a password into the +top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green +depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are +using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box +just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped +the first password by comparing them. + + + All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters +(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password. + +
+ +
+ + Enter a user + + + Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but +enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and +anything else the average user does with his computer + + + + Icon: if you click on this button it will change the +users icon. + + + + Real Name: Insert the users real name into this text +box. + + + + Login Name: Here you enter the user login name or let +drakx use a version of the users real name. The login name is case +sensitive. + + + + Password: In this text box you should type in the user +password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the +strength of the password. (See also ) + + + + Password (again): Retype the user password into this +text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user +password text boxes. + + + + + Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but +write protected) home directory. + + However, while using your new install, any user you add in MCC - +System - Manage users on system will have a home directory that +is both read and write protected. + + If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised +to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot. + + If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all +extra needed users in the Configuration - Summary step +during the install. Choose User management. + + The access permissions can also be changed after the install. + + +
+ +
+ + Advanced User Management + + + If the advanced button is clicked you are offered a +screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are +adding. Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account. + + + Anything a guest with a default rbash guest account +saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest +should save his important files to a USB key. + + + + + Enable guest account: Here you can enable or disable a +guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, +but he has more restricted access than normal users. + + + + Shell: This drop down list allows you to change the +shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are +Bash, Dash and Sh + + + + User ID: Here you can set the user ID for the user you +are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless +you know what you are doing. + + + + Group ID: This lets you set the group ID. Also a +number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know +what you are doing. + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24f0d8b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + +
+ + Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media) + + + + + + + + + + + + + This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can +add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The +source selection determines which packages will be available for selection +during the next steps. + + For a network source, there are two steps to follow: + + + + Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up. + + + + Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a +mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by +Mageia, like the non-free , the tainted repositories and the updates. With +the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS +installation. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5637749e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + +
+ + + Choose the mount points + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If +you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you +can change the mount points. + + + If you change anything, make sure you still have a / +(root) partition. + + + + + Every partition is shown as follows: "Device" ("Capacity", "Mount point", +"Type"). + + + + "Device", is made up of: "hard drive", ["hard drive number"(letter)], +"partition number" (for example, "sda5"). + + + + + If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from +the drop down menu, such as /, /home +and /var. You can even make your own mount points, for +instance /video for a partition where you want to store +your films, or /cauldron-home for the +/home partition of a cauldron install. + + + + For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount +point field blank. + + + + + Choose Previous if you are not sure what to choose, +and then tick Custom disk partitioning. In the screen +that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size. + + + If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on +Next, and choose whether you only want to format the +partition(s) DrakX suggests, or more. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2052c4de --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +
+ + + + + Desktop Selection + + + + + + Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine +tune your choice. + + After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package +installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the +Details button + + + + + + + Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE or +Gnome desktop environment. Both come with a full +set of useful applications and tools. Tick Custom if +you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the +default software choices for these desktop environments. The +LXDE desktop is lighter than the previous two, +sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ec198e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +
+ + + Package Group Selection + + + + + + + + + + Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on +your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however +more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which +become visible as the mouse is hovered over them. + + + + Workstation. + + + + Server. + + + + Graphical Environment. + + + + Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or +remove packages. + + + Read for instructions on how to do a +minimal install. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..468e873e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +
+ + + Choose Individual Packages + + + + + + + + + Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your +installation. + + After having made your choice, you can click on the floppy +icon at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages +(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the +same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install +and choosing to load it. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d88c6c13 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + +
+ + + + Configure your Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your +system. + + There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and +see all services in it. + + The setting DrakX chose are usually good. + + If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info +box below. + + Only change things when you know very well what you are doing. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..671dd296 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + +
+ + + + Configure your Timezone + + + + + + + + + + + + + Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the +same time zone. + + In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to +GMT, also known as UTC. + + + If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they +are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT. + +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33eb4e57 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card) + + + + + + DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually +correctly identify your video device. + + If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know +which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: + + + + vendor + + + + then the name of your card + + + + and the type of card + + + + If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in +the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the +Xorg category + + The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card +drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the +option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities. + + Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access +to the Commandline Interface. + + + Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which +may only be available in the Non-free or Tainted repositories and in some +cases only from the card manufacturers' websites + + The Non-free and Tainted repositories need to be explicitly enabled to +access them, you should do this after your first reboot. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18a0c2f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +
+ + + Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration + + + + + + + + + No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) +you chose for this install of Mageia, they are +all based on a graphical user interface system called X Window +System, or simply X. So in order for +KDE, Gnome, LXDE or +any other graphical environment to work well, the following +X settings need to be correct. Choose the correct +settings if you can see that DrakX didn't make a +choice, or if you think the choice is incorrect. + + + + Graphic card: Choose your card +from the list if needed. + + + + Monitor: You can choose +Plug'n Play when applicable, or choose your monitor +from the Vendor or Generic +list. Choose Custom if you prefer to manually set the +horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor. + + + Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor + + + + + Resolution: Set the desired +resolution and color depth of your monitor here. + + + + Test: The test button does not +always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your +settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your +settings are correct, you can answer "yes", and the settings will be +kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen +and be able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. Make +sure your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't +available + + + + Options: Here you can choose to +enable or disable various options. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a2ff54d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Choosing your Monitor + + + DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually +correctly identify yours. + + + Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage +your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing +what you are doing. If in doubt you should consult your monitor +documentation + + + + + + Custom + + This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh +rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the +screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are +displayed. + + It is VERY IMPORTANT that you do not specify a monitor +type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you +may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and +consult your monitor documentation. + + Plug 'n Play + + This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the +monitor database. + + Vendor + + If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which +one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: + + vendor + + + + the monitor manufacturers name + + + + the monitor description + + + + Generic + + selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as +1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is +often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver +when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it +may be wise to be conservative in your selections. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad76d0cb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake + + + + + + + + + + If you wish to use encryption on your / partition you +must ensure that you have a separate /boot partition. The +encryption option for the /boot partition must NOT be +set, otherwise your system will be unbootable. + + + Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, +change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what +is in them before you start. + + + There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an +USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them. + + + Push Clear all to wipe all partitions on the selected +storage device + + For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, +or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it. + + Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes. + + Click Done when you're ready.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad9285df --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Partitioning + + + In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the +solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install +Mageia. + + The options available from the list below will vary depending on your +particular hard drive(s) layout and content. + + + + + + + Use Existing Partitions + + If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have +been found and may be used for the installation. + + + + Use Free Space + + If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for +your new Mageia installation. + + + + Use Free Space on a Windows Partition + + If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may +offer to use it. + + This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, +but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all +important files! + + Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The +partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down +correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, +although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been +moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to +back up your personal files. + + + + Erase and use Entire Disk. + + This option will use the complete drive for Mageia. + + Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! + + If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already +have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use +this option. + + + + Custom + + This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your +hard drive(s). + + + + + Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the +previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available +hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested +with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 +MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning +tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following +settings: + + "Align to" "MiB" + + "Free space preceding (MiB)" "2" + + Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes. + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b17aa02b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +
+ + + Congratulations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + You have finished installing and configuring +Mageia and it is now safe to remove the +installation medium and reboot your computer. + + After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating +systems on your computer (if you have more than one). + + If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install +will be automatically selected and started. + + Enjoy! + + Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to +Mageia + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8d1f9576 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +
+ + + Formatting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on +partitions not marked for formatting will be saved. + + Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted + + Click on Advanced to choose partitions you want to +check for so called bad blocks + + + If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on +Previous, again on Previous +and then on Custom to get back to the main screen. +In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions. + + + When you are confident about the selection, click on +Next to continue. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e3258ae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + +
Updates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Since this version of Mageia was released, some +packages will have been updated or improved. + + Choose yes if you wish to download and install them, +select no if you don't want to do this now, or if you +aren't connected to the Internet + + Then press Next to continue + +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/installer.xml b/docs/installer/tr/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..242173d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +DrakX, the Mageia Installer + + + Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia +Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as +possible. + + + + +The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will +start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need. + +
+ + Installation Welcome Screen + +
+ + If there are problems during install, then it may be necessary to use +special installation options, see . + +
+ + The installation steps + + + The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed +on the side panel of the screen. + + Each step has one or more screens which may also have +Advanced buttons with extra, less commonly required, +options. + + Most screens have Help buttons which give further +explanations about the current step. + + + If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is +possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a +partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your +computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well +leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure +rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys +Alt Ctrl F2 at the same time. After that, press +Alt Ctrl Delete simultaneously to reboot. + +
+ +
+ + Installation options + + + If the installation fails then it may be necessary to try again by using one +of the extra options available by hitting the F1 +(Help) key see + + This will open the following text based help. + +
+ + Installation Help Screen + +
+ +
+ + Installation Problems and Possible Solutions + + +
+ + No Graphical Interface + + + + + After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection +screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using +low resolution by typing vgalo at the prompt. + + + + If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be +possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use +this hit ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be +presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and hit +ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode. + + +
+ +
+ + The Install Freezes + + + If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a +problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of +hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type +noauto at the prompt. This option may also be combined with +other options as necessary. +
+ +
+ + Kernel Options + + + These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the +available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the +mem=xxxM parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of +RAM. e.g. mem=256M would specify 256MB of RAM. +
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7afd82b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +
+ + Media Selection (Nonfree) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are +available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories +selection determines which packages will be available for selection during +the next steps. + + + + The Core repository cannot be disabled as it contains +the base of the distribution. + + + + The Non-free repository includes packages that are +free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain +closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this +repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, +firmware for various WiFi cards, etc. + + + + The Tainted repository includes packages released under +a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is +that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, +e.g. Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages +needed to play commercial video DVD, etc. + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..30c6a452 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +
+ + + + Minimal Install + + + + + + You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the +Package Group Selection screen, see . + Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for +their Mageia, such as a server or a specialised +workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package +Selection, see . + If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer +you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X. + + + + + +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f139ceb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +
+ + Summary of miscellaneous parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on +the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the +settings here and change them if you want after pressing +Configure. + +
+ + System parameters + + + + + Timezone + + DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred +language. You can change it if needed. See also + + + + Country / Region + + If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you +correct the setting. See + + + + Bootloader + + DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting. + + Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo + + For more information, see + + + + User management + + You can add extra users here. They will each get their own +/home directories and will not be able to look in your or +each other's documents, mails, pictures and other files. + + + + Services: + + System services refer to those small programs which run the background +(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks. + + You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may +prevent your computer from operating correctly. + + For more information, see + + +
+ +
+ + Hardware parameters + + + + + Keyboard: + + This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on +your location, language or type of keyboard. + + + + Mouse: + + Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs +etc. + + + + Sound card: + + This section allows you to fine tune your sound card. In most cases the +options selected will work with your computer. + + + + Graphical interface: + + This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays. + + For more information, see . + + + + + +
+ +
+ + Network and Internet parameters + + + + + Network: + + You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free +drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the Mageia +Control Center, after having enabled the non-free media +repositories. + + + When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch +that interface as well. + + + + + Proxies: + + A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider +internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a +proxy service. + + You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you +need to enter here + + +
+ +
+ + Security + + + + + Security Level: + + Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default +setting (Standard) is adequate for general use. + + Check the option which best suits your usage. + + + + Firewall: + + A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the +rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it. + + Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your +selections will depend on what you use your computer for. + + + Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky. + + + +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..999db2b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> +partition + + + You have more than one +Windows® partition. +Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing +Mageia. + + + + +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1980ffde --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + +
+ + + + Security Level + + + + + + + + + + + + You can adjust your security level here. + + Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose. + + After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings +in the Security part of the Mageia Control Center. +
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ad16e16 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + +
+ + + + + Select your Country / Region + + + + + + + + + + + + + Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, +like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country +can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network. + + If your country isn't in the list, click the Other +Countries button and choose your country / region there. + + + If your country is only in the Other Countries list, +after clicking OK it may seem a country from the +first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real +choice. + + +
+ + + Input method + + + In the Other Countries screen you can also select an +input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input +multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the +default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India +Live-CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input +method so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input +methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be +installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection. + + + If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it +after you boot your installed system via "Configure your Computer" -> +"System", or by running localedrake as root. + +
+
+ diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b974b129 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Install or Upgrade + + + + + + + + Install + + Use this option for a fresh Mageia installation. + + + + Upgrade + + If you have one or more previous installations of +Mageia on your system, the installer will allow +you to upgrade one of them to the latest release. + + + + + If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to +reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been +formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in +the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an +unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you +want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys Alt Ctrl +F2 at the same time. After that, press Alt Ctrl +Delete simultaneously to reboot. + + + + If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you +can return from the "Install or Upgrade" screen to the language choice +screen by pressing Alt Ctrl Home. Do +not do this later in the install. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cca7e57b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + +Keyboard + + + DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable +keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout. + + + + + + + Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard +layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the +specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There +may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also +look here: en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout + + + + If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on +More to get a full list, and select your keyboard +there. + + + After choosing a keyboard from the More dialog, +you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though +a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly +and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the +full list. + + + + + If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an +extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin +and non-Latin keyboard layouts + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b4d3d2d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Please choose a language to use + + + Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your +continent. Mageia will use this selection during +the installation and for your installed system. + + If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your +system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the +Multiple languages button to add them now. It will be +difficult to add extra language support after installation. + + + + + + Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them +as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be +marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen . + + + + + If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then +it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well. + + + + Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the +"multiple languages" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your +language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages. + + + + You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia +Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system. + + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..579e3ce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +
+ + + Select mouse + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a +different one here. + + Usually, Universal - Any PS/2 and USB +mice is a good choice. + + Select Universal - Force evdev to +configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9fa259fb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +
+ + Bootloader main options + + + + + + + + + If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by +the installer, you can change them here. + + You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case +you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or +allow Mageia to create a new one. + + + The Mageia graphical menus are nice :) + + +
+ + Using a Mageia bootloader + + + By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR +(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other +operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia +boot menu. + + Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB +legacy and Lilo. + + + Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by +GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is +used. + + The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at +the Summary page during installation. + +
+ +
+ + Using an existing bootloader + + + If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember +to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader +Configure button, which will allow you to change the +bootloader install location. + + Do not select a device e.g."sda", or you will overwrite your existing +MBR. You must select the root partition that you chose during the +partitioning phase earlier, e.g. sda7. + + To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device. + + + Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type df to check where +your / (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to +the installer screen. + + + The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader +is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve +running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and +add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in +question. +
+ +
+ + Bootloader advanced option + + + If you have very limited disk space for the / partition +that contains /tmp, click on +Advanced and check the box for Clean /tmp +at each boot. This helps to maintain some free space. +
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b59f034 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + +
Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry + + + + + + + + + You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the +relevant button in the Bootloader Configuration screen +and editing the screen that pops up on top of it. + + + + + + Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an +entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one. + You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely. + The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a +choice while booting up. +Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't +just try something without knowing what you are doing. + +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2b238c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + +
+ + + Setup SCSI + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers +it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently +fail to recognise the drive. + + If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) +you have. + + DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly. +
diff --git a/docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ef634b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/tr/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +
+ + + Confirm hard disk to be formatted + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Click on Previous if you are not sure about your +choice. + + Click on Next if you are sure and want to erase every +partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk. +
-- cgit v1.2.1